Categories
Business guides

How to start a gardening business

Starting a gardening business can be a rewarding way to turn your passion for plants and outdoor spaces into a thriving income. Whether you’re looking to take on smaller residential projects or build a broader portfolio, the path to success is about getting the basics right from the beginning.

This guide will give you helpful and practical advice on how to start a gardening business in Australia.

Step 1: Identify the market of your gardening business

Identifying the right market is key to attracting clients and growing your gardening business. Tailor your offerings to the specific needs of your community—whether it’s lawn care, landscaping, or ongoing maintenance. By targeting the right audience and solving their problems, you’ll build a strong reputation and attract clients more effectively.

Explore different types of gardening services

There are various types of gardening services you can offer depending on your skills, equipment, and the needs of your clients. Let’s delve deeper into these  common gardening services:

Garden maintenance

Including garden maintenance in your services ensures that your clients’ gardens stay healthy, attractive, and well-maintained year-round. This ongoing care, which includes tasks like general clean up, installing sod or artificial grass, and lawn care helps build lasting relationships with clients. Offering this service creates a steady income stream while enhancing your reputation as a reliable, all-in-one gardening expert.

A well-maintained garden featuring neatly trimmed hedges, a manicured lawn, and a central fountain surrounded by symmetrical landscaping
Regular garden maintenance ensures that the outdoor space stays beautiful, functional, and inviting all year round | Source: Bladerunner Property Services

Garden renovation

Garden renovation involves transforming or revitalising an existing garden to improve its appearance, functionality, or overall design. This can range from minor upgrades to complete overhauls like creating a vertical garden for small spaces and a dedicated area where the client can grow produce like tomatoes or even a sunflower garden– all depending on the client’s needs and vision.

Lawn care and turf installation

Lawn care and turf installation are essential services for homeowners looking to maintain or establish a healthy, vibrant lawn. Properly installing synthetic turf and nurturing the lawn is required to ensure that the client’s lawn stays lush, green, and free of weeds. 

Hedge trimming and topiary

Offering hedge trimming and topiary services is essential for maintaining the shape, health, and aesthetics of your clients’ shrubs and bushes. These services help keep gardens looking neat and well-manicured, enhancing their overall appearance. By including them in your offerings, you provide clients with a polished, professional garden that stands out.

Weed management

Weed management is the process of controlling and removing unwanted plants like crabgrass that compete with the garden’s desired plants for nutrients, water, and sunlight. Effective weed management helps maintain a healthy and attractive garden while preventing weeds from spreading.

Seasonal planting and garden bed design

Seasonal planting and garden bed design keep gardens vibrant year-round by selecting plants that thrive in each season. Preparing the garden for winter with hardy plants ensures it remains healthy and ready to bloom in warmer months. 

Offering these services not only enhances the garden’s appeal but also positions you as an expert in maintaining gardens through all seasons.

Irrigation system installation and maintenance

Irrigation system installation and maintenance ensure gardens receive the right amount of water efficiently. Tailored systems like drip irrigation or sprinklers are installed to meet the specific needs of each garden. 

Regular upkeep offered by professional gardening services helps prevent damage, conserve water, and support healthy plant growth, making it an essential service for maintaining a thriving garden.

Tree care and pruning

If your gardening business includes creating a rainforest garden, tree care and pruning are essential in maintaining the health and appearance of trees by removing dead or overgrown branches, improving airflow, and promoting healthy growth. 

Hardscaping and pathway installation

Hardscaping and pathway installation create durable, attractive features like patios and walkways, enhancing garden functionality and aesthetics. Consider offering expertise in selecting the right synthetic grass to add business value, ensuring your clients a lush, green look that complements their overall garden design.

A newly installed garden pathway made of gravel, bordered by natural stones and surrounded by lush greenery, leading through a landscaped area with trees and bushes.
Hardscaped features such as pathways and patios enhance the usability of a garden while adding to its aesthetic appeal | Source: Bowen, David Paul

Composting and soil improvement services

Composting and soil improvement services enhance soil health by adding organic matter and nutrients. This promotes better drainage, supports healthy plant growth, and helps create a more sustainable, thriving garden.

Choose your gardening business niche

Choosing your gardening business niche is essential for standing out in a competitive market. By focusing on specific types of gardening services, you can target a particular audience and build expertise in that area. 

Residential garden maintenance niche

The residential garden maintenance niche focuses on providing ongoing care for homeowners, including lawn mowing, hedge trimming, weeding, and seasonal clean-ups. You can also offer a maintenance service focused on keeping their garden pet-friendly, so that their fur companions can roam around safely and freely.

  • Pros: Consistent income and long-term client relationships
  • Cons: Typically priced lower compared to larger landscaping or design projects

Garden design and landscaping niche

The garden design and landscaping niche involves creating customised outdoor spaces, including plant selection, hardscaping, and garden layout design. This niche is extremely helpful especially if you’re working with smaller gardens.

  • Pros: Opportunity to showcase creativity and design skills
  • Cons: Requires more expertise, planning, and time due to complexity
A driveway with neatly laid yellow pavers bordered by dark grey tiles, leading to a brick house with a carport.
The garden design and landscaping niche focuses on crafting tailored outdoor spaces and functional layout designs | Source: Mckenna, John

Organic and sustainable gardening niche

The organic and sustainable gardening niche focuses on eco-friendly practices, using natural methods to grow plants, improve soil health, and reduce environmental impact.

  • Pros: Attracts clients who value sustainability and green living.
  • Cons: Requires more specialised knowledge and higher costs for organic products

Edible gardening business niche

The edible gardening business niche focuses on helping clients grow their own fruits, vegetables, herbs, and other edible plants.

  • Pros: Targets the interest in homegrown food and healthy living
  • Cons: Clients will need regular guidance to successfully grow and harvest their edible crops.

Commercial and property maintenance niche

The commercial and property maintenance niche involves providing gardening and landscaping services to larger and high-scale clients. 

  • Pros: Opportunity for consistent work, as commercial properties typically require regular maintenance throughout the year.
  • Cons: Requires a larger team and more extensive resources to handle bigger projects and maintain multiple properties

Decide on the service area for your gardening business

Determining where to establish or expand your gardening business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for gardening services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for gardening services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional gardeners in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Gardening Job Demand
Gardening services in Melbourne22.5%
Gardening services in Perth18.1%
Gardening services in Brisbane17.4%
Gardening services in Sydney16.0%
Gardening services in Adelaide5.2%

Australian cities with the highest gardening job demand

Melbourne leads the gardening business demand in 2024, holding a significant 22.5% share of total job demand. This demand can be attributed to the city’s large urban population, which often requires professional gardening services to maintain private gardens, especially in suburban areas.

Perth follows with an 18.1% share. Perth’s climate and a strong preference for outdoor spaces among residents likely fuel this demand, as regular maintenance is essential to keep gardens thriving in its dry conditions.

Brisbane ranks third with 17.4% of the total demand. Its tropical climate and higher prevalence of greenery mean consistent upkeep is required, driving significant demand for professional gardeners.

Australian cities with lower gardening job demand

Sydney and Adelaide show comparatively lower shares, with Sydney at 16.0% and Adelaide at 5.2%. Although Sydney’s urban density may limit large gardens, its affluent suburbs still provide opportunities. Businesses can cater to Sydney by focusing on niche services such as vertical gardening and rooftop gardens.

Smaller cities like Adelaide present a modest market. However, businesses here can capitalise on less competition and offer premium or specialised services tailored to local preferences, such as native plant landscaping or drought-resistant gardening solutions.

Understanding seasonal trends in the gardening business is essential for managing demand fluctuations and optimising your operations. 

For example, gardening services often experience a surge in bookings during spring and summer, as these seasons are ideal for planting, lawn care, and outdoor projects. Winter, though less busy, can offer unique opportunities for tasks like pruning, soil preparation, and garden renovation in preparation for the growing season.

A beautifully landscaped garden with a mulched flower bed and vibrant plants.
Adapting to seasonal changes is key for a successful gardening business, helping you anticipate customer needs and maintain smooth operations year-round | Source: Eager Beaver Garden Care

Some months may bring a significant influx of clients, while others slow down, making it crucial to plan ahead. By strategically adapting to these seasonal cycles, you can maintain consistent revenue and ensure business stability throughout the year, regardless of demand variations.

Identify popular seasons for gardening services

According to Oneflare’s 2024 data on the total job postings for each type of service, the 2024 seasonality data for gardening services highlights January, October, and February as the peak months for various gardening services in Australia. 

Key factors influencing these peak months include seasonal growth patterns, outdoor events, and the need for garden preparations during spring and summer. Warmer weather in these months also encourages homeowners to invest in garden care and landscaping projects.

Peak season for garden maintenance

Garden maintenance sees its busiest months in January, February, and October. The demand in January and February is largely driven by the need to clean up and rejuvenate gardens after the holiday season. Additionally, the fast-growing plants during summer months necessitate regular upkeep. 

In October, as spring reaches its peak, homeowners often focus on ensuring their gardens are well-maintained to enjoy outdoor activities and gatherings.

Peak season for garden renovation

Garden renovation demand peaks in October, September, and February. Spring months like October and September are ideal for extensive garden overhauls, as the moderate temperatures and increased rainfall provide optimal conditions for planting and landscaping. 

February also experiences a notable rise in demand, likely due to the completion of summer projects and preparations for the autumn season.

Peak season for turf installation

Turf installation is most in demand during October, September, and August. The spring months of October and September are particularly favourable for laying turf, as the mild weather and consistent rainfall help establish new lawns effectively. August also sees an increase in demand as homeowners prepare their outdoor spaces for the upcoming warmer months.

Peak season for lawn mowing

The busiest months for lawn mowing are January, February, and October. During the peak summer months of January and February, lawns grow rapidly due to the warm weather and require frequent mowing. October, with its spring growth surge, also drives significant demand as homeowners aim to keep their lawns well-groomed.

Peak season for lawn care and fertilisation

Lawn care and fertilisation see the highest demand in October, September, and March. Spring months such as October and September are crucial for feeding lawns to encourage growth after winter dormancy. March also marks an important period for fertilisation as homeowners prepare their lawns to endure the cooler autumn months.

Peak season for landscaping services

The busiest months for landscaping services are October, September, and February. October and September, in spring, are ideal for landscaping projects as the mild weather and consistent rainfall create perfect conditions for planting and outdoor transformations. 

February sees significant demand as the late summer period allows for the completion of large-scale landscaping projects. This timing ensures that gardens are ready to transition smoothly into autumn while maintaining their aesthetic appeal and functionality.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

To ensure steady business throughout the year, it’s essential to plan strategies that adapt to seasonal fluctuations. Diversifying your offerings and staying proactive with marketing can help smooth out income gaps and keep your business running consistently, regardless of the season.

Diversify your gardening service offerings

During peak seasons, like spring and summer, focus on high-demand services such as lawn mowing, hedge trimming, and general garden maintenance. Homeowners are more likely to invest in keeping their gardens tidy and vibrant during these months, providing a steady stream of work.

In quieter months, like autumn and winter, pivot to specialised services such as garden design, pruning, or indoor plant care. These tasks are less reliant on the growing season and can keep your business active year-round. Offering one-off services like garden redesigns or indoor plant installations ensures consistent income, even during slower times.

Offer seasonal packages and gardening promotions

Seasonal packages and promotions can help attract clients year-round. In spring and summer, offer deals on lawn care and planting vibrant, warm-weather plants like marigolds or native Australian species. Tailoring your services to the season keeps clients engaged and encourages repeat business.

Plan for flexible staffing

Planning for flexible staffing is key to managing fluctuating demand. As your business grows, consider hiring additional help during peak seasons or for larger projects. When hiring a gardener, look for someone with experience, reliability, and a passion for the work. Flexibly adding staff as needed allows you to meet client demands without overextending yourself.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring gardening clients

Posting on lead generation sites like Oneflare can help you secure recurring gardening clients. By listing your services on these platforms, you increase your visibility to homeowners and businesses actively seeking gardening help. With a well-crafted profile and competitive pricing, you can attract clients looking for regular maintenance or long-term care, ensuring a steady stream of work.

A screenshot of Oneflare's platform displaying top-rated gardening experts near a user.
Leveraging lead generation platforms like Oneflare connects you with potential clients, increasing your chances of securing recurring gardening projects | Source: Oneflare

Register your gardening business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted gardeners like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the gardening industry

Researching market rates and analysing competitors in the gardening industry is essential to set competitive pricing for your services. By understanding the average cost of gardening services in your area, you can ensure your prices are in line with local expectations while maintaining profitability. 

Understand the cost of common gardening services

Several factors influence the cost of gardening services, including the size and complexity of the job, the type of services offered, the location of the property, and the equipment and materials needed. Additionally, the level of expertise required and the time it takes to complete the job also play a role in determining the overall cost.

Here’s a breakdown of the typical costs for various gardening services in Australia:

Type of Gardening ServiceAverage Cost Range
Garden maintenance cost $50 – $120 per visit
Lawn mowing cost$35 – $55 per hour
Pruning and hedging cost$45 – $150 per session
Garden clean-up cost$45 – $120 per service
Turf installation (natural grass) cost$7 – $13 per square metre
Artificial grass installation cost$50 – $100 per square metre
Landscape design and installation cost$20,000 – $44,550 per project
Irrigation system installation cost$1,800 – $5,200 per system
Mulching cost$15 – $65 per cubic yard
Weed control cost$50 – $125 per application

By considering these influences, you can set fair prices that reflect the value of your services while staying competitive in the market.

Please note, however, that the costs mentioned are estimates and may vary depending on the specific job and local market conditions.

Decide how to charge for gardening services

To determine how gardeners must charge, it’s helpful to research local market rates and competitor pricing, while considering your skill level and the quality of service you provide. This will allow you to set fair and competitive rates that attract clients and sustain your business.

Hourly rate for quick gardening services

An hourly rate for quick gardening services is ideal for smaller tasks like lawn mowing or hedge trimming. It allows clients to pay based on the time spent, offering transparency and flexibility. 

Setting a competitive hourly rate requires researching local market rates to ensure fair pricing for both you and your clients. Remember not to sell yourself short! 

Per-service rates for recurring gardening services and routine maintenance

Per-service rates for recurring gardening services and routine maintenance provide clients with a fixed cost for each visit, making budgeting easier. By offering per-service rates, you create a predictable income stream and build long-term relationships with clients who require ongoing care for their gardens.

Per square metre rates for gardening services like lawn installation and paving

Per square metre rates for gardening services, such as lawn installation and paving, allow clients to pay based on the size of the area being worked on. This pricing model is ideal for larger projects, as it provides a clear, straightforward way to estimate costs.

Project-based rates for large-scale gardening projects

Project-based rates for large-scale gardening projects offer a fixed price for the entire job, regardless of time or materials. This pricing model is ideal for extensive projects like garden design, landscaping, or major renovations, where the scope of work is clear from the start.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Evaluating your unique selling points (USPs) is crucial for differentiating your gardening business in a competitive market. USPs highlight what sets your services apart. 

By identifying and promoting these strengths, you can attract clients who value what makes your business stand out, helping you build a loyal customer base and grow your reputation in the industry.

Eco-friendly and sustainable gardening practices

Eco-friendly and sustainable gardening practices focus on using natural methods to maintain gardens while reducing environmental impact. This approach attracts environmentally conscious clients and promotes a greener future.

Customised garden solutions

These solutions ensure that every garden is both functional and aesthetically pleasing, with seasonal gardening practices incorporated to keep spaces thriving year-round. By providing customised services, businesses can address specific needs, creating unique outdoor spaces that perfectly reflect the client’s vision and requirements.

Reliable, consistent, and on-time gardening services

These attributes are essential for building trust and satisfaction with clients. By ensuring punctuality and delivering high-quality work consistently, businesses can foster long-term relationships and a strong reputation. 

Clients appreciate dependable services that maintain their gardens to a high standard, making timeliness and reliability key factors in customer retention and business growth.

Full-range gardening services

Full-range gardening services cover all aspects of garden care, from designing retaining walls and landscaping to regular maintenance and seasonal tasks. This comprehensive approach ensures that clients can rely on a single provider for all their gardening needs.

Offering a wide variety of services helps attract diverse clients and builds long-term relationships by providing a complete solution for every garden.

A screenshot from Oneflare highlighting unique selling points (USPs) for a service provider.
Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your gardening business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: Sky Tree Lopping

Step 4: Explore funding options for your gardening business

Securing funding for your gardening business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business professional discussing funding options with a client, holding a document and pen at a desk with a laptop in the background
Exploring funding options is a key step in starting your gardening business, ensuring you have the resources to launch and grow successfully | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial gardening business supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your gardening business, like vehicles, gardening tools, and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Equity investment is a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to secure a stake in the company. Startup gardening businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic gardening business plan

Starting a gardening business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

An expert reviewing a detailed business plan document with charts and graphs, sitting at a desk with a laptop in the background
Developing a strategic gardening business plan is essential for setting clear goals, outlining growth strategies, and achieving long-term success | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your gardening business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your gardening business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your gardening business description

Your gardening business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your gardening business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your gardening business niche and types of services

The next step is to define the focus of your gardening business, whether it’s regular garden maintenance, landscape design, irrigation system installation, or a specific niche such as organic gardening, edible gardens, or sustainable landscaping.

A modern house with a well-maintained lawn, neatly arranged landscaping, and large potted plants on a patio.
Clearly defining your gardening business niche helps you target the right clients and showcase your specialised services effectively | Source: Keep It Neat Home And Garden Service

Clarify why you chose this niche and provide a brief description of your target market. For instance, your target audience could be homeowners seeking a well-maintained garden, businesses needing professional landscaping, or individuals looking for unique and personalised gardening solutions such as eco-friendly designs or low-maintenance outdoor spaces.

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and gardening business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your gardening services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of gardening services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a gardening business, such as adverse weather affecting scheduled work, injuries during a gardening task, and property damage while working on client sites. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance and equipment insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new gardening services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your gardening business

To start a gardening business, you may need to obtain registrations, licenses and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government.

Step 7: Hire your gardeners

Building a reliable team for your gardening business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire gardeners and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A professional gardener wearing protective gear and a high-visibility uniform uses a hedge trimmer to shape a neatly trimmed bush.
Hiring skilled gardeners ensures high-quality service delivery, helping your business maintain a professional image and meet client expectations effectively | Source: Fox Mowing & Gardening

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as garden maintenance, landscape design, installing irrigation systems, or creating themed gardens) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and find the right gardeners for your business, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, gardening skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask how they managed challenging gardening projects in the past, dealt with unexpected weather conditions or last-minute changes, or met tight deadlines while delivering high-quality gardening results and customer satisfaction.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your gardeners will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Start with training sessions to introduce them to your gardening business’s standards, client communication protocols, and the specific workflows or tools they’ll use to ensure efficient and high-quality gardening services.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your staff. 

Step 8: Invest in the right gardening tools and equipment

Investing in the right gardening tools and equipment is crucial for delivering efficient and high-quality services. High-quality tools help improve productivity, ensure precision, and reduce time spent on each job. 

Bear in mind, though, that each gardening business niche requires specialised tools and equipment. Here’s a breakdown of some key items and their estimated costs:

Gardening Business Tools and EquipmentPrice RangeWhere to Buy
Gardening tools set$100 – $500Aussie Gardener, Bunnings
Lawn mowers and trimmers$200 – $1,500Tools Warehouse, Bunnings
Irrigation equipment$150 – $1,000StrataGreen, Sage Horticultural
Professional-grade pruners and shears$50 – $300Quality Garden Supplies, Backyard Botanist
Portable mulching machines$500 – $2,000The Garden Superstore, Bunnings
Soil testing kits$20 – $200GardensOnline, Aussie Gardener
Protective clothing and gear$50 – $300Green Hip Workwear, Bunnings

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary depending on retailers, brands, and product quality.

Step 9: Find clients for your gardening business

Finding clients for your gardening business involves a mix of networking, marketing, and leveraging online platforms like Oneflare. 

By focusing on establishing long-term relationships and showcasing your expertise along with these strategies, you can steadily grow your client base and establish a strong reputation in the community.

Expand your online presence

Expanding your online presence is essential for growing your gardening business and reaching a wider audience. Creating a professional website, engaging on social media platforms, and listing your business online help increase visibility and attract new clients.

Build your gardening business website

A website is essential for establishing your gardening business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful gardening business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience.

Fox Mowing & Gardening

The Fox Mowing & Gardening website boasts a striking green accent colour to accentuate its relevance to nature. It features an easy-to-navigate layout with a clear portfolio of garden transformations and organised service descriptions. Customer testimonials are prominently displayed, showcasing the business’s reliability and high-quality work.

The Fox Mowing & Gardening website features a green and black colour scheme, showcasing services like lawn care, fertilising, and landscaping.
The Fox Mowing & Gardening website uses a bold green accent colour, reinforcing its connection to nature while ensuring the brand’s services are visually engaging and easy to navigate | Source: Fox Mowing & Gardening
Green Outdoor

Gardening expertise is clearly highlighted In the Green Outdoor website where they address common client pain points such as overgrown lawns and lack of time for garden upkeep. The website copy effectively communicates how the team can solve these issues with professional care and tailored solutions. 

The homepage of the Green Outdoor website features a black-and-white background image of hands working in soil, with a bold green logo and tagline for lawn mowing and gardening services.
The Green Outdoor website highlights gardening expertise by addressing common client concerns like overgrown lawns and lack of time | Source: Green Outdoor Lawn Mowing & Gardening Services

Services are listed with detailed descriptions, ensuring clients understand exactly what’s offered and how it meets their specific needs, making it easy for them to choose the right service.

Rgs Landscape Care

On the Rgs Landscape Care website, landscape maintenance is the main focus, highlighting the team’s skills in keeping gardens vibrant and well-maintained throughout the year. Other services are also clearly listed, offering a full range of solutions. The site provides free quotations, allowing potential clients to easily get an estimate and understand the cost of services upfront.

The homepage of the Rgs Landscape Care website features a close-up of a vibrant green lawn with a blurred background of trees and outdoor seating.
The Rgs Landscape Care website focuses on landscape maintenance, showcasing the team’s expertise in keeping gardens lush, vibrant, and professionally maintained throughout the year | Source: Rgs Landscape Care

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for gardening businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for gardening services, providing an immediate source of leads.

A Oneflare profile for Grass Scorpions Pty Ltd, showcasing business qualifications, contact details, reviews, and badges such as "Most Hired Award."
Posting on lead-generation platforms like Oneflare is a highly effective way for gardening businesses to connect with potential clients | Source: Grass Scorpions

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your gardening expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

Get started on Oneflare by registering your gardening business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

A Google search results page for “gardening services Sydney Oneflare,” showing sponsored listings and top-ranked Oneflare pages offering gardening services and free quotes in Sydney, NSW | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your gardening work and portfolio visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a gardening business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

Gardener’s Touch – Facebook advertising

The Gardener’s Touch Facebook account features photos and videos of the team in action, showcasing their expertise through real-time project updates. Each post highlights their skill and attention to detail, building trust with potential clients.

The Gardener's Touch Facebook page displaying a cover photo of a landscaped garden with a pond, along with posts featuring project updates, including a photo of a neatly trimmed tree.
The Gardener’s Touch Facebook page highlights their expertise through photos and videos of completed projects and real-time updates | Source: Gardener’s Touch
Must Have Maintenance – Instagram advertising

The Must Have Maintenance Instagram account showcases stunning images of completed garden projects, giving clients a clear view of the team’s craftsmanship. Each photo highlights beautifully designed landscapes, offering potential clients inspiration and a glimpse of what their own gardens could look like after expert care and transformation.

The Instagram profile of Must Have Maintenance, featuring a professional logo, bio, and posts highlighting beautifully maintained gardens and landscapes.
The Must Have Maintenance Instagram account highlights their craftsmanship with stunning images of completed garden projects | Source: Must Have Maintenance
Earth Edge Garden – TikTok advertising

The Earth Edge Garden Tiktok account features captivating content showcasing garden transformations and projects in progress. Each video has a therapeutic feel, with calming visuals of the team at work, turning overgrown spaces into stunning gardens. The soothing pace and satisfying results create a binge-worthy experience, making viewers want to watch more and imagine their own outdoor spaces being transformed.

The TikTok profile of Earth Edge Garden, displaying a logo, bio describing their services as bespoke raised bed kitchen garden consultants, and a collection of videos featuring garden transformations, plants, and outdoor designs.
The Earth Edge Garden TikTok account captures attention with engaging videos of garden transformations and projects | Source: Earth Edge Garden

Build your gardening business’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new gardening clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

A Oneflare reviews section showing verified client feedback for various gardening services, including lawn mowing, rubbish removal, and tree lopping, along with a professional response to one of the reviews.
Building a strong reputation through positive reviews on platforms like Oneflare helps establish credibility and trust, attracting new gardening clients and ensuring long-term business success | Source: Daniels property maintenance

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win gardening jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks.

Step 10: Get paid for your gardening services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your gardening services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a hand pressing the 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen to complete an online payment.
Simplify payments for your gardening services by offering secure and convenient online payment options for your clients | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a gardening business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable gardening services invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free gardening invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s gardening invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's invoice templates, showing options to share, download, or print invoices for clients.
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing removal invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s gardening invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for gardening services. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for gardening services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s gardening invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help gardening businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s gardening invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organized layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for gardening businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking gardening services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Cultivate your gardening business with Oneflare today! 

Starting your gardening business is an exciting journey, and each step you take nurtures the soil of success. From defining your services to building a loyal client base, every action you take strengthens your reputation and sets you up for long-term growth.

Ready to let your business flourish? Register your gardening business and post your services on Oneflare to connect with homeowners and businesses in need of expert gardening help. 

Start today and watch your gardening business flourish!


FAQs on how to start a gardening business

Which is the best example of a sustainable practice that might be used in a garden?

One of the best examples of a sustainable practice in gardening is using native plants. Native plants are well-suited to the local climate and soil conditions, meaning they require less water, fertiliser, and pesticides to thrive.

Where is the best place to advertise gardening services?

The best places to advertise gardening services are online platforms like Oneflare, and local business directories, where homeowners and businesses actively search for professional help. Social media platforms are great for showcasing your work. 

Traditional methods like flyers and business cards are also effective for attracting local clients. A mix of online and offline advertising helps you reach a broad audience.

How much does it cost to start a gardening business?

Starting a gardening business typically costs between $2,000 and $5,000. Essential expenses include tools (lawnmowers, trimmers), business registration, insurance, and marketing. Costs can vary depending on the scale of your operation, but keeping overheads low in the beginning is key to managing expenses.

Categories
Business guides

How to start a removals business

Starting a removals business is a great opportunity for entrepreneurs looking to capitalise on the growing demand for relocation services. However, like any business venture, it requires careful planning and execution to ensure success. 

A couple of questions arise when starting a removals business. Do I need a license to start a moving company? What permits do I need to start a moving company? How do I find the right audience?

In this article, we’ll answer these questions, as well as provide a step-by-step guide on how to start a removalist business. We’ll also share valuable insights and tips to help you navigate the challenges and seize the opportunities in this industry.

Step 1: Identify the market of your removals business

Before you plan any further steps, it’s crucial to understand the market you intend to serve. In this stage, you need to understand the various types of moving services so you can choose the right niche based on your expertise, skills, and preferences.

Explore different types of removal and moving services

There are different types of removal and moving services, and each of them caters to a specific market segment.

Full-service moving

Full service moving offers a complete range of services from packing and loading to transportation and unloading at the destination. These services typically handle residential and commercial moves, catering to those who prefer a hassle-free experience and are willing to pay a premium so they don’t forget any important moving needs

A red and green moving truck from Strawberry Moving Services parked in front of a modern residential building, with cloudy skies in the background.
Full-service moving companies handle packing, loading, and unloading to make your move hassle-free | Source: James, Strawberry

Furniture moving 

Furniture moving is a specialised service that focuses solely on transporting large furniture items, such as sofas, beds, and wardrobes. It’s a suitable choice for customers who need to move only a few large pieces of furniture. For this service, you need to have the necessary equipment and expertise to handle bulky and heavy items.

Local removalist

As a local removalist, you would focus on providing services within a specific geographical area, typically a city or town. This type of business caters to customers who are moving locally and require assistance with packing, loading, transportation, and unloading. Local removalists can offer competitive pricing due to their focus on short-distance moves and familiarity with the local area.

Interstate removalist

An interstate removalist refers to a removals company or business that specialises in long-distance moves across different states or territories. These businesses typically have a fleet of large trucks equipped to handle long-haul transportation, as well as the necessary permits and licenses to operate across multiple jurisdictions. Interstate removalists cater to customers who are relocating to a new state or region, often for employment or personal reasons.

Regional removalists

Regional removalists offer moving services within a specific region or area, spanning multiple cities or towns. These businesses cater to customers who are relocating within a particular region, whether it’s for work, family, or other reasons. Regional removalists have a deep understanding of the local areas they serve, which can be advantageous in terms of route planning and navigating local regulations.

Office relocation services

Office relocation services are perfect for businesses and organisations that need to relocate their office premises. For this service, you need to be equipped with the right techniques for moving an entire office,  including disassembling and reassembling furniture, safely transporting office equipment and electronics, and minimising downtime to ensure business continuity. 

These services are often tailored to the client’s specific needs, considering factors such as the size of the office, the nature of the business, and any specific requirements or regulations that need to be met.

Packing and unpacking services

Packing and unpacking services involve professional movers handling the entire packing process and unpacking household or office items. The services include packing fragile items, disassembling and reassembling furniture, and ensuring that all belongings are securely packed for safe transportation. Packing and unpacking are useful for customers who want to save time and reduce stress during the moving process. 

A professional mover wrapping a beige sofa with protective plastic wrap in a spacious living room, preparing it for transportation during a moving process.
Packing and unpacking services ensure items are securely prepared for transport, saving time and reducing stress during your move | Source: Speedy Move

Specialised removals

Specialised removals refer to services that cater to the relocation of specific types of items or belongings that require specialised handling, equipment, or expertise. Examples include moving a piano, fine art and antique items, pool tables, or hot tubs and spas. These niche services are typically offered by removalists who have received specialised training and have invested in the necessary equipment to handle such delicate or unique items safely and efficiently.

Storage and removals services

Storage and removal services combine the convenience of temporary storage solutions with the expertise of professional movers. These services are helpful for customers who need to store their belongings for a while during the moving process or for those who require additional storage space.

Removalists offering storage services often have secure and climate-controlled facilities where customers can safely store their household items, furniture, or office equipment. These storage units are available in various sizes to accommodate different needs and can be rented on a short-term or long-term basis.

Interstate backloading services

Interstate backloading services refer to a cost-effective way of transporting goods over long distances. Removalists often consolidate multiple smaller shipments into a single large truck or container, which is then transported to the destination. This allows customers to share the cost of transportation, making it more affordable for those moving interstate or across the country.

Backloading services are particularly useful for moving a smaller volume of goods, or a few pieces of furniture or household items, which is an essential part of any moving interstate checklist. Instead of paying for a full truck or container, they can take advantage of the available space in a larger shipment that is already scheduled to travel to their desired destination.

Choose your removals business niche

Now that you understand the different types of removal and moving services, it’s essential to identify your niche within the industry. This will help you solidify your specific role as a removalist, target the right customers, and differentiate yourself from competitors.

Specialised furniture and item removal business niche

Moving and removing specialised furniture items are perfect if you have the necessary equipment and expertise to handle bulky, delicate, or antique pieces. This niche allows you to cater to customers who value the safe and professional handling of their prized possessions, such as heirlooms, artwork, or high-end furniture.

  • Pros: Ability to command higher prices for specialised services, the potential for repeat business from satisfied customers with prized possessions, and an opportunity to develop strong relationships with antique dealers, art galleries, or high-end furniture retailers as referral sources.
  • Cons: Higher risk of damage to valuable items, specialised equipment and training may be required, smaller target market compared to general moving services.
Two professional movers carefully lifting and handling a large antique wooden cabinet in a brightly lit room with yellow curtains and a chandelier.
Specialised furniture removals require expertise and equipment to safely handle bulky or delicate items like antiques, artwork, and high-end furniture, catering to customers who value professional care | Source: Advance Movers

Office and corporate relocation niche

If you prefer working with businesses and organisations, the office and corporate relocation niche could be an excellent fit. This specialised service caters to companies that need to relocate their entire operations, including office furniture, equipment, and sensitive documents.

  • Pros: Potential for larger and more lucrative contracts, opportunity to establish long-term relationships with businesses as a trusted partner, steady workflow with scheduled office moves, potential for recurring business from clients expanding or downsizing.
  • Cons: Strict deadlines and time constraints, need for specialised equipment and training for handling sensitive materials and equipment, potential liability for any downtime or disruption to client operations.

Interstate and regional removals business niche

An interstate and regional removal business can be a good option if you’re willing to take on long-distance moves. This niche involves transporting belongings across state or regional borders, often over significant distances. It caters to individuals, families, or businesses relocating to a new city or state.

  • Pros: Potential for larger-scale moves and higher revenue, opportunity to establish a reputation as a reliable long-distance mover, ability to serve a broader geographic area, potential for recurring business from clients who move frequently.
  • Cons: Longer travel times and increased fuel costs, need for specialised equipment and logistics for long-distance moves, the potential for delays due to weather or road conditions, and more complex scheduling and coordination across multiple locations.

Eco-friendly removals business niche

Catering to eco-conscious clients is a growing trend in the removal industry. This niche focuses on environmentally sustainable practices, such as using recycled or biodegradable packing materials, optimising transportation routes to reduce carbon emissions, and promoting responsible waste disposal.

  • Pros: Appealing to a growing market segment of environmentally aware customers, the potential to differentiate your business and establish a unique brand identity, opportunities for cost savings through efficient resource utilisation, and aligning with corporate social responsibility initiatives.
  • Cons: Potentially higher upfront costs for eco-friendly materials and equipment, need for specialised training and certifications, additional logistical considerations for sustainable practices, smaller initial target market compared to traditional removal services.

Small-scale and local moves niche

Focusing on small-scale and local moves can be an excellent niche to consider, especially when starting out. This niche caters to individuals or families relocating within the same city or a nearby area.

  • Pros: Lower overhead costs with shorter travel distances, the potential for a loyal local customer base, easier coordination and scheduling, opportunities for referrals and repeat business within the community, and reduced logistical complexities compared to long-distance moves.
  • Cons: Limited revenue potential compared to larger-scale moves, increased competition from other local movers, need for effective local marketing and brand awareness, potential for seasonality in demand depending on the local housing market.

Decide on the service area for your removal business

Determining where to establish or expand your removal business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for removal services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for removal services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional removalists in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Removals Job Demand
Removalist services in Sydney20.78%
Removalist services in Brisbane16.77%
Removalist services in Melbourne12.71%
Removalist services in Perth9.15%
Removalist services in Newcastle4.40%

Australian cities with the highest removals job demand

Sydney leads the removals job market in 2024, capturing 20.78% of the total demand. This high share is driven by Sydney’s high population density and frequent relocations associated with job changes, urban migration, and rental turnovers in a competitive housing market. The city’s fast-paced lifestyle further necessitates professional removal services to streamline the moving process.

Brisbane follows with 16.77% of the total demand. Brisbane’s growing population and suburban expansion contribute to this high demand, as many families and businesses move within and around the area for better housing options and lifestyle improvements.

Melbourne ranks third with 12.71% of the total demand. The city’s significant share is due to its diverse population, which sees frequent residential shifts driven by education, job opportunities, and lifestyle changes, especially among younger professionals and international migrants.

Australian cities with lower removals job demand

While Perth and Newcastle show lower job demand, capturing 9.15% and 4.40% of the total market, respectively, they still present opportunities for removals businesses. Perth’s demand stems from its isolated geography, where professional services are often necessary to facilitate relocations, particularly for long-distance or interstate moves. Newcastle’s smaller market allows businesses to specialise, offering tailored services like handling bulky furniture or providing eco-friendly moving solutions.

For businesses operating in these regions, leveraging local community ties and offering niche services, such as affordable rates for regional moves or specialized packing solutions, can help them capture a loyal customer base in these smaller but steady markets.

Understanding seasonal trends in the removals industry is crucial for managing demand fluctuations and optimising your operations. Certain times of the year may see a surge in client requests, such as during the summer when people are more likely to move houses or during holiday periods when businesses relocate. Other times, demand may slow down.

By aligning your services with seasonal needs—like offering discounts during quieter months or promoting advanced bookings before peak seasons—you can maintain a steady revenue stream and ensure the long-term stability of your removals business, regardless of demand fluctuations.

A white moving truck branded with "Kahlon Movers" parked in a suburban area, advertising local, interstate, and storage services.
Understanding seasonal trends, such as peak moving periods in summer, allows you to optimise your removals operations and maintain steady revenue with tailored promotions and services | Source: Kahlon Movers

Identify popular seasons for removals services

According to Oneflare’s 2024 data on the total job postings for each type of service, the top months for removals services in 2024 are January, June, and July.

The high demand in January is likely driven by the start-of-year relocation trends, where families and professionals move to align with the new work and school year. June and July show peaks due to mid-year transitions, often related to university moves, changes in rental leases, or seasonal employment shifts.

Peak season for interstate removalist jobs

Interstate removals experience the highest demand in January, December, and June. The surge in January is linked to New Year relocations, while December’s activity stems from end-of-year moves before holidays. June’s peak reflects mid-year adjustments by students and professionals.

Peak season for local removalist jobs

Local removals peak in January, June, and July. These months coincide with seasonal factors like rental turnovers, particularly in urban areas, and individuals taking advantage of the summer break for short-distance moves.

Peak season for regional removalist jobs

Regional removals see the highest demand in January, followed by June and July. These peaks are often driven by families and businesses relocating to suburban or rural areas during the school and financial calendar transitions

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

To ensure that your business stays ahead of the curve and ahead of the curve and can effectively manage seasonal demand, consider implementing these strategies: 

Offer seasonal promotions and discounts for removal services

Offering seasonal promotions and discounts for removal services is an effective way to attract customers during slower periods and maintain a steady revenue stream throughout the year. 

Consider offering discounted rates or package deals during the off-peak months, such as February to May and September to November. These promotions can incentivise customers to book their moves during these quieter times, helping to balance out the workload and cash flow.

Focus on complementary services during slow seasons

During the slower periods in the removal industry, consider diversifying your offerings by focusing on complementary services. These could include storage solutions, packing and unpacking assistance, furniture assembly and disassembly, or even home organisation services. 

You can also explore partnerships with related businesses, such as real estate agents or property management companies, to cross-promote services and tap into new customer bases.

Promote advanced removal service booking

Encouraging customers to book their removal services well in advance can help you better manage your resources and staffing during peak periods. Offer incentives, such as discounts or priority scheduling, for customers who book their moves several months in advance. This ensures that you can meet the demand during the busiest times and allows you to plan your operations more efficiently.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring removals clients

Lead generation sites like Oneflare can be a valuable tool for securing recurring clients for your removal business. The platform allows you to advertise your services and connect with potential removal leads who are actively seeking your services.

One of the main advantages of using Oneflare is that you can potentially establish long-term relationships with customers who require recurring removal services. This could include businesses that frequently relocate employees, property management companies, or individuals who move frequently for work or personal reasons.

When you establish your online presence on Oneflare, you can build a reputable brand that can attract a loyal client base. With the platform’s review system, satisfied customers can leave positive feedback about your services, further enhancing your credibility and attracting new clients.

Screenshot of Oneflare's platform showcasing top-rated removalist AAA City Removalist with detailed qualifications, reviews, and a call-to-action for requesting quotes.
Lead generation platforms like Oneflare help removal businesses secure recurring clients by showcasing their qualifications, reviews, and services to attract potential leads actively seeking removal assistance | Source: Oneflare

Register your removals business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted removalists like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the removals industry

Understanding market rates and competitor strategies helps you position your services competitively and meet customer expectations. 

Understand the cost of common removal services

Determining how much to charge for moving services requires researching industry standards and analysing local competitors. Factors influencing how much a moving service costs include the type of service, distance, and the volume of items being moved. Offering competitive yet sustainable pricing ensures your business remains attractive to customers while covering operational expenses. 

Here’s how much most removal and moving services in Australia cost:

Type of Removal ServiceAverage Cost Range
Local removalist cost$100 to $200 per hour
Interstate removalist cost$2,000 to $4,500
Specialist removalist cost$200 to $750
Piano removal cost$250 to $1,500
Self-storage unit cost$260 to $600 per month
Furniture removals cost$80 to $150 per item or $150 to $600 for multiple items
Office relocations cost$500 to $3,000+, depending on office size, equipment, and distance
Emergency removals cost$150 to $300 per hour
Backloading removals cost$800 to $2,000+ 

These cost ranges are intended as general estimates and may vary based on location, specific requirements, and individual service providers. Keep in mind that additional factors, such as special handling or last-minute bookings, may influence the final cost.

Decide how to charge for removal and moving services

When clients hire a removalist, most often, the first thing they want to know is how much it’s going to cost them. As mentioned above, the removalist labour hire​ prices may vary so it’s vital to have various pricing options to meet different customer needs and budgets.

Hourly rate for local moves with short distances

For local moves with short distances, many removalists charge an hourly rate. This pricing model is suitable for moves that don’t require extensive travel or a full day’s work. The hourly rate typically covers the cost of labour, fuel, and transportation for a specified number of movers and a truck. Additional fees may apply for extra services like packing, disassembly/reassembly of furniture, or handling specialty items.

Fixed quotes for long-distance or interstate moves

Many removalists provide fixed quotes based on the total volume or weight of the belongings, the distance travelled, and any additional services required (e.g., packing, storage). Fixed quotes offer customers transparency and predictability regarding the total cost upfront. 

To calculate an accurate fixed quote, you can conduct an in-home survey or virtual assessment to evaluate the scope of the move.

Per cubic metre pricing for transporting large or irregularly shaped items

Per cubic metre pricing is a common approach for removalists when transporting large or irregularly shaped items that don’t fit neatly into standard and free boxes or containers. This pricing model charges based on the total cubic volume of space the items occupy in the moving truck or container.

The key benefits of per cubic metre pricing include fairness, flexibility, and transparency. Here, you’ll need to carefully measure and calculate the total cubic space required for the customer’s items during the pre-move assessment. Factors like item fragility, handling requirements, and any necessary disassembly/reassembly can also impact the final per cubic metre rate you charge.

Per item or service-based charges for specialised removals

For certain types of specialised removals, removalists often charge per item or per service provided. This pricing approach is suitable when handling fragile, valuable, or oversized items that require extra care and specialised equipment or expertise.

The per item or service fee usually covers the additional labour, materials, and specialised equipment required to safely move or handle these items. You may also factor in the level of expertise and care needed to ensure the items are properly protected during the move.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Another important factor to consider is your unique selling points (USPs) that differentiate your removal business from competitors. Perhaps you offer specialised services or maybe you provide eco-friendly packing materials and sustainable moving practices. Identifying and promoting your USPs can help attract customers who value those specific offerings.

Guaranteed damage-free relocation

One USP for a removal business could be offering a guaranteed damage-free relocation service. This assurance would provide customers with peace of mind, knowing their belongings are in safe hands and will arrive at their new location in the same condition they left. This could involve using specialised packing materials, customised crating for fragile items, and advanced equipment like air-ride trucks to minimise jarring during transport.

All-in-one moving solutions

Another compelling USP is offering all-in-one moving solutions. This comprehensive approach streamlines the entire relocation process for customers by providing a wide range of services under one roof. From packing and crating to transportation, storage, and unpacking at the new location, an all-in-one moving solution simplifies the logistics and reduces stress for customers.

Flexible scheduling and emergency moves

Customers often have specific timelines and constraints when it comes to moving, and the ability to accommodate their schedules can be a significant advantage. Flexible scheduling could involve providing evening, weekend, or even 24/7 availability for bookings and moves, ensuring that customers can plan their relocation at a time that’s most convenient for them.

Providing emergency move services can also be a valuable USP. Unexpected situations, such as natural disasters, landlord disputes, or sudden job relocations, can necessitate a swift and efficient move. With this unique offer, you can cater to customers in urgent need, providing a timely solution and reducing their stress during a challenging period.

Eco-friendly moving practices

As environmental consciousness continues to grow, offering eco-friendly moving practices can be a unique USP for a removal business. Customers are increasingly seeking sustainable solutions that minimise their environmental impact, and businesses that prioritise green initiatives can differentiate themselves from competitors.

One eco-friendly approach is to use reusable and recyclable packing materials, such as biodegradable packing peanuts, recycled cardboard boxes, and cloth blankets instead of plastic wrap. This reduces waste and appeals to environmentally conscious customers who want to minimise their carbon footprint.

Don’t forget to formalise agreements with a detailed removalist contract to avoid misunderstandings and ensure transparency with clients. Additionally, using a moving invoice template or a removal invoice template can streamline your billing process, keeping records organised and professional.

Screenshot from Oneflare highlighting unique selling points for removalist services, including all-inclusive quoting, fast interstate delivery, and strong communication, with a form to get free quotes.
Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your removals business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: Moush’s Removals

Step 4: Explore funding options for your removals business

Securing funding for your removals business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business professional discussing funding options with a client, holding a document and pen at a desk with a laptop in the background
Exploring funding options is a key step in starting your removals business, ensuring you have the resources to launch and grow successfully | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial removals business supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your removals business, like vehicles, removal and moving tools, and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup removals businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic removals business plan

Starting a removals business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

An expert reviewing a detailed business plan document with charts and graphs, sitting at a desk with a laptop in the background
Developing a strategic removals business plan is essential for setting clear goals, outlining growth strategies, and achieving long-term success | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your removals business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your removals business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your removals business description

Your removals business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your removals business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your removals business niche and types of services

The next step is to define the focus of your removals business, whether it’s general residential moving, interstate relocations, furniture transport, or a specialised niche such as office relocations or eco-friendly moving services.

Clarify why you chose this niche and provide a brief description of your target market. For example, your target audience could include homeowners needing reliable local moves, businesses seeking large-scale office relocations, or clients looking for specialised offerings like sustainable packing solutions, fragile item transport, or 24/7 emergency removal services.

Two professional movers using straps to carry a mattress into a moving truck on a sunny day, with other packed items visible in the truck.
Defining your removals business niche, such as residential moving or specialised services like fragile item transport, helps you target the right audience and build a focused, successful operation | Source: JB Removals

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and removals business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your removals services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of removal services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a removals business, such as damage to clients’ belongings during transit, injuries sustained while lifting or moving heavy items, and liability issues related to delays or miscommunication about services. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance, or workers’ compensation insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new removal services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your removals business

To start a removals business, you may need to obtain registrations, licenses and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government.

Step 7: Hire your removalists

Building a reliable team for your removals business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire removalists and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A professional worker assembling a wooden bed frame in a residential room with built-in storage and curtains in the background.
Hiring skilled removalists who can handle tasks like furniture assembly ensures your removals business meets customer expectations and builds a reliable reputation | Source: Blitz Removals

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as packing and wrapping items, safely transporting furniture, assembling and disassembling furniture, or loading and unloading trucks) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and find the right removalists for your business, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, removal and moving skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask how they managed challenging removal projects in the past, dealt with narrow access points or difficult-to-move items, or met tight deadlines while ensuring safe transport and delivering excellent customer satisfaction.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your removalists will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Start with training sessions to introduce them to your removals business’s standards, client communication protocols, and the specific workflows or equipment they’ll use to ensure efficient and high-quality moving services.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your staff. 

Step 8: Invest in the right removal tools and equipment

Having the appropriate moving tools and equipment ensures efficient and safe handling of clients’ belongings. With the right equipment, you can minimise the risk of damage, increase productivity, and ultimately provide a smoother and more professional service to your customers.

Each removals business niche requires specialised tools and equipment. Here’s a breakdown of key items, their estimated costs, and where to purchase them in Australia:

Removals Tools and EquipmentPrice RangeWhere to Buy
Heavy-duty removalist hand trolley$259Bunnings
Furniture removalist blankets$25.90 – $119.70Protection Experts Australia
Moving boxes and packing supplies$48 – $332.75 (packs)The Moving Box Company
Packing tape and dispensers$3.50 – $10Packstore
Bubble wrap rolls$20 – $50Gateway Packaging
Furniture protection covers$7.50 – $15Packstore
Removalist cartons$5 – $10 per boxGateway Packaging
Moving dollies and trolleys$100 – $300Wheel Easy Moving Equipment
Strapping and securing equipment$50 – $150Protection Experts Australia
Safety gear (gloves, high-visibility vests, etc.)$20 – $100Bunnings

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary depending on retailers, brands, and product quality.

Step 9: Find clients for your removals business

Once everything is set, it’s time to find clients for your business. This includes expanding your online presence so you can build your reputation and gather positive reviews from your clients. You will also need to be proactive in managing your bookings and quotes efficiently.

Expand your online presence

Having a strong online presence is crucial for removals businesses. Thankfully, there are various methods you can employ to expand your online presence and reach potential customers:

Build your removals business website

A website is essential for establishing your removals business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful removals business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

Advance Movers’ website

The Advance Movers website does a great job of keeping things simple and easy to navigate, which is perfect for anyone planning a move. It’s clear about what they offer—house moves, office relocations, and even packing services—and there’s a handy “Get a Free Quote” button right up front to make reaching out hassle-free. They also highlight key details like their no-hidden-fee policy and professional experience, which helps build trust. 

Homepage of Advance Movers website featuring a smiling couple unpacking boxes, a prominent "Get a Free Quote" form, and details about their moving services and operating hours.
Advance Movers’ website keeps navigation simple, with clear service descriptions and a prominent “Get a Free Quote” feature, ensuring an easy and trustworthy customer experience | Source: Advance Movers
AAA City Removalist’s website

The AAA City Removalist website is clean, modern, and easy to navigate making it easy for visitors to find what they need. With clear service descriptions, pricing transparency, and simple online booking, customers can quickly see how the company makes moving easier. Trust is built through visible reviews and certifications, while straightforward calls-to-action (CTAs) guide users to take the next step. 

All in all, the website offers a smooth, stress-free experience that reflects the company’s commitment to customer satisfaction.

Homepage of the AAA City Removalist website showcasing a professional mover with boxes, a smiling couple, and prominent features like Google reviews, certifications, and a "Get a Quick Quote" button.
The AAA City Removalist website combines clear service descriptions, reviews, and certifications with user-friendly navigation and calls-to-action, offering a seamless and trustworthy experience for customers | Source: AAA City Removalist
CutRate Removals’ website

The Cut Rate Removals website strikes a great balance between a professional look and engaging content. The homepage highlights the key services and benefits with visuals and clear messaging. Customer satisfaction is also their priority, with testimonials and a clear call to action that encourages users to take the next step. It’s easy to navigate, providing a positive and informative experience for anyone considering their services. 

Homepage of Cut Rate Removals website featuring a moving truck with a ramp, bold text stating "Home Moving Made Easy," and detailed descriptions of their furniture moving services.
The Cut Rate Removals website combines engaging visuals, clear service descriptions, and customer-focused messaging, offering a professional and user-friendly experience for potential clients | Source: Cut Rate Removals

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for removals businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for removal services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your removal and moving expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

Oneflare profile page for Red Storm Removals, showcasing business details, qualifications, reviews, and a "Get Free Quotes" feature for potential customers.
Platforms like Oneflare help removals businesses connect with clients actively seeking services, offering a risk-free way to showcase expertise, build trust through reviews, and attract targeted leads | Source: Red Storm Removals

Get started on Oneflare by registering your removals business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

Google search results for "removals businesses Oneflare," displaying Oneflare's listings for furniture, office, and storage removalists with customer ratings and reviews.
Leverage SEO and paid search to boost your website’s visibility and attract organic traffic | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your removal services and client works visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a removals business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

777 World Removals Pty Ltd – Facebook advertising

The 777 World Removals Pty Ltd Facebook page is all about keeping things informative and engaging. They post real visuals from their recent jobs, which helps build trust with their audience. The content is easy to read, offering tips or updates that are useful for anyone looking to move. Plus, their contact details are right at their fingertips, and with auto-reply in place, inquiries are acknowledged quickly. It’s a friendly, approachable page that makes reaching out and staying connected simple.

Facebook page of 777 World Removals Pty Ltd featuring a banner, recent posts with moving tips, job visuals, contact details, and customer interaction features.
The 777 World Removals Facebook page combines informative posts, real visuals, and quick response features, creating an approachable platform for potential clients to learn about their services and get in touch easily | Source: 777 World Removals
Crusader Removals – Instagram advertising

Crusader Removals’ Instagram page effectively engages followers by regularly posting customer reviews and showcasing how they support the community. Their consistent use of black and red business colours gives the page a strong, recognisable brand identity. The contact details and website links are easy to find, ensuring that potential clients can reach out or learn more quickly. 

Instagram page of Crusader Removals featuring posts with customer reviews, holiday-themed messages, and branding in black and red, along with contact details and a website link.
Crusader Removals’ Instagram page effectively engages followers with customer reviews, consistent branding, and community-focused posts | Source: Crusader National
Movalist – TikTok advertising

Movalist’s TikTok page stands out with engaging and interactive content. They feature interviews with people about moving, offer helpful tips, and share informative videos on moving preparations. The captions are engaging, and the variety of videos ensures the content stays fresh and interesting. Their location and contact details are easy to find, making it simple for followers to reach out while enjoying useful moving-related content.

TikTok profile of Movalist featuring interactive videos, moving tips, and engaging captions, with visible contact information and a link to their website.
Movalist’s TikTok page uses engaging videos and interactive content to entertain and inform followers, while clear contact details make it easy for potential clients to connect | Source: Movalist

Build your removals business’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new removal clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

Verified customer reviews for local removalists on Oneflare, showcasing both positive and negative feedback about service experiences.
Building a strong reputation through consistent client reviews on platforms like Oneflare enhances credibility and attracts new clients, ensuring long-term success for your removal business | Source: Smiley’s Furniture Removals

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win removalist jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks. 

Step 10: Get paid for your removal services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your removal services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a hand pressing the 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen to complete an online payment.
Simplify payments for your removals services by offering secure and convenient online payment options for your clients | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a removals business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable removal services invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free removal invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s removal invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's invoice templates, showing options to share, download, or print invoices for clients.
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing removal invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s removal invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for different businesses, like a removals business. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for removal services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s removal invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help removals businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s removal invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organized layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for removals businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking removal services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Kickstart your removals business – join Oneflare today! 

Starting a removals business requires careful planning, from understanding the type of services to offer to deciding on your pricing model. 

In this article, we’ve covered key steps like planning for seasonal strategies, exploring your funding options, and identifying unique selling points to set yourself apart. Remember that in business, the key is consistency and transparency. The more trustworthy you are, the more customers you will attract, regardless of the marketing strategies you use.

Now that you’re equipped with the knowledge, why not take the next step? Post your services on Oneflare to connect with potential clients and get your removals business moving forward. It’s time to turn your plans into action!


FAQs on how to start a removals business

How to handle fragile items during a move?

To handle fragile items, use high-quality packing materials like bubble wrap, packing peanuts, and sturdy boxes. Carefully label these boxes as “fragile” to ensure movers handle them with extra care.

How long does it take to move a house in Australia?

The time it takes to move a house in Australia depends on the size of the home, the amount of belongings, and the distance. Typically, local movers take between 4 to 8 hours to finish a whole moving house checklist, while long-distance moves can take several days, depending on the distance and logistics.

How much does it cost to start a removals business?

The total cost of starting a removals business will ultimately depend on how big you want to start, but these are the general areas you will need to plan for. Generally, key expenses include the purchase or lease of suitable vehicles, securing proper licenses and insurance, acquiring necessary equipment, and covering operational costs such as staffing and marketing.

Categories
Business guides

How to start a carpentry business

Starting a carpentry business in Australia can feel like a big step, especially when you’re working with limited resources and handling everything on your own. From deciding your service area and evaluating your niche to hiring your carpenters and securing your first clients, the early stages of this type of business require careful planning and the right strategies to succeed.

This guide will show you how to start a carpentry business on a small scale, focusing on practical steps to build your portfolio, attract clients, and set your business up for steady growth. With the right approach, you can establish yourself as a trusted carpenter and create opportunities for long-term success in the industry.

Step 1: Identify the market of your carpentry business

Before launching your carpentry business, it’s crucial to identify the services that are most needed in your area. Understanding the demand will help you focus on the right offerings, attract clients more effectively, and position your business to stand out in a competitive market.

Explore different types of carpentry services

As outlined by the Australian Government, carpenters are highly skilled in constructing, installing, renovating, and repairing structures and fixtures using wood, plywood, wallboard, and other materials. With a wide range of services to offer, it’s important to focus on those that match your expertise and appeal to your target clients. 

Below are some of the most types of carpentry services in Australia.

Custom furniture making

Custom furniture making involves designing and building unique, high-quality furniture pieces tailored to a client’s specifications. This service appeals to homeowners looking for bespoke solutions that reflect their personal style and add value to their space.

Cabinetry and joinery

Cabinetry and joinery services focus on creating built-in cabinets, shelves, and storage solutions for kitchens, bathrooms, and other parts of the home. This service is ideal for residential renovations and small commercial projects where precision and craftsmanship are key.

Elegant built-in cabinetry with white storage units and modern design, complemented by wood-look flooring and patterned tiles in a home interior
Cabinetry and joinery services offer bespoke built-in solutions for kitchens, bathrooms, and living spaces, enhancing both functionality and aesthetics in any home | Source: J & C Cabinets (Vic)

Home renovation carpentry

Home renovation carpentry includes tasks like installing doors, building stairs, adding skirting boards, and trims, as well as building outdoor sheds. It’s an essential service for clients looking to renovate their homes without taking on full-scale construction work.

Commercial carpentry

Commercial carpentry involves larger-scale projects such as fitting out offices, retail spaces, or restaurants. This service requires working with businesses to provide functional and aesthetically pleasing woodwork solutions that meet industry standards.

Outdoor carpentry

Outdoor carpentry focuses on creating decks, installing pergolas, repairing fences, and building garden features. These projects appeal to homeowners looking to improve their outdoor living spaces and add value to their properties.

Wooden flooring installation and repair

Wooden flooring services include installing new wooden floors or repairing existing ones to restore their appearance. This service is in demand for both residential and commercial properties, where durability and a polished look are priorities.

Newly installed wooden flooring on a covered outdoor deck, showcasing a polished and durable finish, with a dark wooden shed in the background.
Wooden flooring installation and repair services are vital for creating durable and polished spaces, whether for residential or commercial properties | Source: Timberland Joinery

Bespoke carpentry

Bespoke carpentry offers custom, one-of-a-kind woodwork solutions, including tailored furniture, decorative features, and detailed joinery. This service attracts high-end clients seeking unique, handcrafted elements for their homes or businesses.

Shopfitting and retail displays

Shopfitting carpentry involves building custom shelving, counters, and display units for retail stores. This service helps businesses optimise their space and create a professional, attractive layout to showcase their products.

Carpentry for building construction

Carpentry for building construction services and businesses includes tasks like framing walls, installing roof trusses, and other structural woodwork for residential or small commercial projects. This service requires collaboration with builders and contractors to deliver reliable results.

Restoration and heritage carpentry

Restoration carpentry focuses on repairing and preserving historical woodwork in heritage homes or buildings. It involves specialised skills to maintain the integrity of original designs while ensuring the structure remains functional and safe.

Custom floor design and inlays

Custom floor design and inlays involve crafting decorative wooden floor patterns, borders, or inlays to enhance the aesthetics of a space. This service appeals to clients seeking high-end finishes and personalised flooring solutions.

Choose your carpentry business niche

Selecting a niche for your carpentry business allows you to focus your skills, attract the right clients, and differentiate yourself in the carpentry market. By specialising in a particular area, you can develop expertise, deliver higher-quality work, and build a reputation that sets you apart from general carpenters.

Custom furniture niche

The custom furniture niche involves designing and crafting one-of-a-kind pieces tailored to a client’s specific needs. This niche requires creativity and attention to detail, catering to homeowners or businesses looking for unique and functional designs.

  • Pros: High demand for unique, handcrafted furniture pieces.
  • Cons: Can be time-consuming and may require specialised tools and a well-equipped workshop.

Outdoor carpentry niche

Outdoor carpentry focuses on building structures such as decks, pergolas, fences, and garden features that enhance residential or commercial outdoor spaces. It’s a popular niche in Australia, where outdoor living is a key part of home improvement and lifestyle.

  • Pros: Steady demand for outdoor improvements, especially in residential areas.
  • Cons: Work is weather-dependent, and may require durable materials and outdoor-grade tools.

Cabinetry and kitchen renovation niche

This niche includes designing custom cabinets, shelving, and storage solutions as part of kitchen and bathroom renovations. It is a highly sought-after service, as many homeowners look to improve functionality and style in these essential spaces.

  • Pros: Strong demand from homeowners undertaking kitchen and bathroom upgrades.
  • Cons: Requires precision and can involve tight project timelines to meet client expectations.

Heritage restoration niche

Heritage restoration carpentry involves repairing, restoring, and preserving original woodwork in heritage-listed homes and buildings. This niche requires a deep understanding of traditional carpentry techniques to maintain historical integrity while ensuring structural safety.

  • Pros: Niche market with opportunities for high-value, specialised projects.
  • Cons: Projects can be labour-intensive and require expertise in traditional carpentry techniques and materials.

Commercial shopfitting niche

The commercial shopfitting niche focuses on creating customised interiors, including counters, shelves, and displays, for retail shops, offices, and restaurants. It often involves balancing functionality and aesthetics to create spaces that are both visually appealing and practical for businesses.

  • Pros: Offers high-value contracts with the potential for ongoing business relationships.
  • Cons: Often involves strict deadlines and requires compliance with industry-specific standards and regulations.
Interior of a commercial cafe featuring a modern shopfitting design with counters, shelves, lighting fixtures, and a refrigerator, creating a functional and visually appealing space.
Specialising in the commercial shopfitting niche allows businesses to provide customised interiors for retail, office, and dining spaces | Source: Timberland Joinery

Decide on the service area for your carpentry business

Determining where to establish or expand your carpentry business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for carpentry services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for carpentry services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional carpentry in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Carpentry Job Demand
Carpentry services in Melbourne28.9%
Carpentry services in Sydney20.7%
Carpentry services in Brisbane18.3%
Carpentry services in Perth12.8%
Carpentry services in Adelaide4.2%

Australian cities with the highest carpentry job demand

Melbourne leads the market with 28.9% of the total carpentry job demand in Australia. The city’s high demand stems from its continuous urban development and vibrant construction industry. Renovation projects and an increasing number of property developments contribute significantly to the need for skilled cabinet makers and carpenters.

Sydney ranks second, capturing 20.7% of the job demand. As one of Australia’s largest metropolitan areas, Sydney experiences a steady demand for carpentry due to a mix of residential and commercial projects, including home renovations and commercial fit-outs in its bustling urban spaces.

Brisbane follows with 18.3%, driven by its growing population and housing sector. The city’s expansion in suburban developments and infrastructure improvements supports a robust market for carpentry services.

Australian cities with lower carpentry job demand

Perth, accounting for 12.8% of demand, and Adelaide, with 4.2%, represent markets with comparatively lower demand. Even so, small cities like them still hold opportunities. Perth’s demand is largely linked to its suburban housing market, while Adelaide’s slower-paced development allows carpentry businesses to focus on specialised services like custom furniture making and heritage restoration.

In these smaller regions, carpentry businesses can stand out by targeting niche markets and offering unique services that cater to local demand, such as bespoke carpentry for renovations or eco-friendly building practices.

Understanding seasonal trends in the carpentry industry is essential for managing fluctuations in demand and optimising operations. Certain times of the year may see an increase in client requests, while other periods may experience a slowdown.

By aligning your services with seasonal needs—such as promoting indoor carpentry projects like cabinetry or custom furniture during winter—you can maintain steady revenue and ensure the long-term stability of your carpentry business, regardless of demand fluctuations.

An outdoor carpentry project showcasing the wooden framework of a roof under a clear blue sky.

Planning for seasonal trends in the carpentry industry ensures your business can adapt to fluctuations in demand | Source: Tradie Taskforce East Melbourne

Identify popular seasons for carpentry services

According to Oneflare’s 2024 data on the total job postings for each type of service, the top three peak months for carpentry services in 2024 are March, October, and January. These months represent periods of high activity in the carpentry sector, driven by a combination of seasonal trends, consumer demand, and project timelines.

March typically sees the highest demand, fuelled by favourable weather conditions ideal for construction and outdoor projects. Additionally, many clients resume home improvement and renovation plans after the summer holidays, making it a busy time for carpenters. 

January also experiences significant demand as homeowners and businesses look to start the year. During this month, most of these clients are executing their renovation plans, setting new goals, and initiating fresh projects.

October marks another month with a demand for carpentry jobs, driven by a mix of pre-summer renovations and preparations for the peak real estate season. Clients often seek carpentry services to complete home upgrades, outdoor spaces, or aesthetic improvements before the busy holiday period or to align with real estate market trends. 

These three months provide excellent opportunities for carpenters to capitalise on heightened demand and maximise their business growth.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

Seasonal fluctuations can impact the demand for carpentry services, with slower periods creating uncertainty for many small business owners. By planning ahead and implementing strategies to keep work steady, you can maintain consistent income and stay productive throughout the year.

Plan ahead for peak seasons and book carpentry projects in advance

Peak seasons, such as warmer months when outdoor projects are popular, can bring a surge in demand for carpentry services. To maximise these opportunities, reach out to clients in advance and schedule projects ahead of time. This ensures you have a steady pipeline of work during busy periods and can manage your workload effectively.

Diversify your carpentry service offerings

Expanding your range of services can help you adapt to slower seasons and attract new clients year-round. For example, if outdoor carpentry slows during winter, you can shift your focus to indoor projects like cabinetry, furniture repairs, or home renovations. Offering a variety of services allows you to fill gaps during seasonal lulls.

Build relationships with other industries needing regular carpentry services

Collaborating with industries such as real estate, property management, or building and construction can provide consistent work throughout the year. For example, property managers often need carpenters for ongoing maintenance, repairs, and renovations, while real estate agents may require upgrades to prepare homes for sale. Building these relationships can lead to repeat projects and long-term partnerships.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring carpentry clients

Using lead generation platforms like Oneflare can help you connect with homeowners and businesses looking for carpentry services, even during slow periods. By consistently promoting your services and building a reputation on these platforms, you can secure recurring clients and maintain a steady flow of projects throughout the year.

A screenshot of Oneflare page listing top carpenters near you, showing business details, reviews, and ratings, highlighting ways to connect with clients.
Post your carpentry services on lead generation sites like Oneflare to build a steady client base and secure recurring projects year-round, even during slower periods | Source: Oneflare

Register your carpentry business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted carpenters like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the carpentry industry

Before setting your prices, it’s essential to research the market rates for carpentry services and assess the competition in your area. Understanding how other carpenters price their work and what services are in demand will help you set competitive rates and position yourself effectively in the market.

Understand the cost of common carpentry services

Carpentry costs can vary depending on the type of service, materials used, project complexity, and location. By familiarising yourself with average price ranges, you can confidently decide how much to charge for your carpentry work while ensuring they align with industry standards and client expectations.

Here, let’s look at how much carpentry services cost in Australia:

Type of Carpentry ServiceAverage Cost Range
General carpentry cost$40 to $120 per hour
Decking installation cost$2,300 – $4,500 per project
Deck sanding and refinishing cost$750 to $1,600 per project
Custom cabinetry installation cost for kitchen renovation$2,500+ (average per job)
Kitchen benchtop installation cost$200 – $2,000 per m²
Timber retaining walls cost$250 to $450 per m²
Hardwood flooring installation cost$20 to $150 per m²
Floating timber floor installation cost$20 to $90 per m²
Parquetry flooring installation cost$45 to $150 per m²
Staircase construction cost$1,000 to $4,000

Do take note that the costs listed above are average estimates and may vary depending on factors such as location, materials used, project complexity, and individual service providers. It’s important to conduct your own research and tailor quotes to suit your specific business and client requirements.

Decide how to charge for carpentry services

Deciding the pricing structure for your carpentry services ensures you’re fairly compensated for your work while keeping your rates competitive. Different types of projects may require different pricing methods, depending on the scope, complexity, and duration of the job.

Hourly rate for furniture repairs and minor installation

Charging an hourly rate is ideal for smaller jobs like furniture repairs, door hanging, or minor installations where the work can be completed within a short timeframe. This method ensures you’re paid for the time spent on the project, including any unexpected challenges that may arise. 

Clients also appreciate the transparency of hourly rates, as it allows them to estimate costs for small, straightforward tasks without committing to a large project.

Flat project rates for defined carpentry projects like kitchen cabinetry

Flat project rates are well-suited for clearly defined carpentry tasks such as building custom cabinetry, fitting shelves, or renovating kitchens, where the scope and timeline are agreed upon upfront. This pricing structure allows you to include the cost of materials, labour, and other expenses in a single, fixed price, providing clarity for both you and your client. 

It also reduces the likelihood of disputes over costs, as the client knows exactly what they will pay for the completed project.

Cost per square metre for large-scale projects like decking

For large-scale projects such as decking, flooring installation, or timber retaining walls, charging per square metre provides a consistent and straightforward pricing method. This approach accounts for the size of the job and helps clients clearly understand how the costs are calculated. 

It’s particularly useful for jobs that require significant material usage, as you can factor in variations in material costs and project complexity to ensure you remain profitable.

Milestone or staged payments for complex projects like bespoke carpentry

Milestone or staged payments are ideal for large, complex projects such as bespoke furniture, full-home renovations, or shop fitting. This structure involves breaking the total cost into payments tied to project milestones—such as an initial deposit, progress payments, and a final payment upon completion. It ensures steady cash flow throughout the project while giving clients confidence that payments align with work progress, reducing risk for both parties.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Identifying your unique selling points (USPs) will set your business apart from other carpenters and give your clients a reason to choose you over others. Highlighting these strengths will help you attract the right clients and build your reputation.

Custom carpentry solutions for every client

Offering custom carpentry solutions allows you to tailor projects to suit your client’s specific needs, styles, and preferences. 

Whether it’s bespoke furniture, tailored cabinetry, or one-of-a-kind outdoor structures, personalised services demonstrate your ability to deliver unique results that can’t be bought off the shelf. This level of customisation appeals to homeowners and businesses looking for creative solutions that enhance the functionality and aesthetic of their spaces.

Eco-friendly materials and sustainable carpentry practices

Incorporating eco-friendly materials and sustainable carpentry practices can be a strong differentiator for your business. By using responsibly sourced timber, reclaimed wood, or low-waste methods, you can attract environmentally conscious clients looking to reduce their carbon footprint. 

Promoting sustainability not only helps the environment but also positions your business as forward-thinking and aligned with modern values.

Exceptional attention to detail and quality carpentry 

Exceptional attention to detail ensures that every cut, joint, and finish is crafted to perfection, delivering results that exceed client expectations. Whether you’re working on small repairs or large bespoke projects, focusing on precision and quality will set you apart from competitors. Clients value carpenters who take pride in their work and are willing to go the extra mile to achieve flawless results that stand the test of time.

End-to-end carpentry service from design to installation

Providing end-to-end carpentry services means managing every stage of a project, from initial consultation and design to final installation. This comprehensive approach simplifies the process for clients, as they only need to work with one provider to bring their vision to life. Offering a complete service builds trust, ensures consistency, and positions you as a reliable expert who can handle all aspects of a project seamlessly.

Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your carpentry business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: Prolux Carpentry Group

Step 4: Explore funding options for your carpentry business

Securing funding for your carpentry business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business professional discussing funding options with a client, holding a document and pen at a desk with a laptop in the background
Exploring funding options is a key step in starting your construction business, ensuring you have the resources to launch and grow successfully | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial carpentry business supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your carpentry business, like vehicles, carpentry tools, and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup carpentry businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic carpentry business plan

Starting a carpentry business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

A construction expert reviewing a detailed business plan document with charts and graphs, sitting at a desk with a laptop in the background
Developing a strategic construction business plan is essential for setting clear goals, outlining growth strategies, and achieving long-term success | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your carpentry business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your carpentry business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your carpentry business description

Your carpentry business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your carpentry business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your carpentry business niche and types of services

The next step is to define the focus of your carpentry business, whether it’s general carpentry services, custom furniture making, cabinetry, outdoor structures like decking, or a specialised niche such as eco-friendly woodworking or bespoke designs.

Clarify why you chose this niche and provide a brief description of your target market. For instance, your target audience might include homeowners seeking high-quality and durable carpentry solutions, businesses requiring commercial fit-outs or customised interiors, or clients looking for unique offerings such as sustainable materials, intricate designs, or tailored furniture pieces.

An outdoor custom-built wooden bench seating area with a modern design, set against a wooden privacy fence and surrounded by garden greenery.
Clearly define your carpentry business niche by showcasing your expertise in creating tailored, high-quality projects like custom outdoor seating for a targeted audience seeking unique and durable solutions | Source: Nail’it Carpentry & Construction

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and carpentry business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your carpentry services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of carpentry services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a carpentry business, such as injuries from using power tools or handling heavy materials, falls from working at heights during construction, and accidental damage to property during installations or repairs. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance or workers’ compensation insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new carpentry services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your carpentry business

To start a carpentry business, you may need to obtain registrations, carpentry licenses, and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government.

Step 7: Hire your carpenters

Building a reliable team for your carpentry business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire carpenters near you and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

Three carpenters working in an indoor space; two are preparing the wall structure, while one sweeps the floor, showcasing teamwork in a renovation project.
Hiring skilled carpenters is a crucial step in building a reliable team for your business. A collaborative workforce ensures project success and helps your business grow efficiently | Source: B2B Home Maintenance

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as constructing custom furniture, installing cabinetry, or building outdoor structures like decks or pergolas) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and find the right carpenters for your business, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, carpentry skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask how they managed challenging carpentry projects in the past, dealt with challenges such as warped timber or complex design requirements, or met tight deadlines while delivering high-quality craftsmanship and ensuring customer satisfaction.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your carpenters will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Start with training sessions to introduce them to your carpentry business’s standards, client communication protocols, and the specific workflows or tools they’ll use to ensure efficient and high-quality carpentry services.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your staff. 

Step 8: Invest in the right carpentry tools and equipment

Having the right tools and equipment will allow you and your team to deliver high-quality carpentry work. Investing in reliable, industry-grade equipment will also keep your carpenters safe while on the job, and help you meet client expectations.

Each carpentry business niche requires specialised tools and equipment. Here’s a breakdown of key items, their estimated costs, and where to purchase them in Australia:

Carpentry Tools and EquipmentPrice Range (AUD)Where to Buy
Circular saws$150 – $500Sydney Tools
Chisels$20 – $150Timbecon
Planers$200 – $600Carbatec
Nail guns$300 – $800Tools Warehouse
Measuring tools (e.g., tape measures, squares)$15 – $100Total Tools
Workbenches$200 – $1,000CWS Store
Clamps$20 – $200Major Woodworking
Safety gear (gloves, goggles, etc.)$20 – $150Bunnings

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary depending on retailers, brands, and product quality.

Step 9: Find clients for your carpentry business

Attracting clients is key to getting your carpentry business off the ground and generating a steady income. By combining online strategies with local networking and referrals, you can build awareness, secure new carpentry job leads, and establish your business as a trusted name in the community.

Expand your online presence

It goes without saying that nowadays, having an online presence is crucial for reaching potential clients and showcasing your work. From building a professional website to promoting your services on lead generation platforms and social media, expanding your online presence will help clients find and trust your business.

Build your carpentry business website

A website is essential for establishing your carpentry business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful carpentry business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

Arentz Trade Services’ website

Arentz Trade Services’ website is highly effective in attracting clients through its visually impressive project gallery, which showcases high-quality images of completed works like decking, landscaping, and timber structures. This feature immediately highlights their craftsmanship and the value they deliver, helping build trust with potential clients. 

The site’s clean design, easy navigation, and prominent contact details ensure a seamless user experience, encouraging visitors to inquire and take the next step.

Screenshot of Arentz Trade Services' website featuring a clean design, project gallery images showcasing timber decks and landscaping, and easy-to-access contact details.
A well-designed website like Arentz Trade Services’ is instrumental in attracting clients by showcasing high-quality projects | Source: Arentz Trade Services
Blade Carpentry’s website

The Blade Carpentry website effectively attracts clients with its clear service breakdown and focus on outdoor carpentry solutions, such as decks, pergolas, and verandahs. The clean, professional layout highlights their expertise in renovations and new builds, helping visitors quickly find the services they need. 

Combined with easy-to-access contact details and visuals that showcase their craftsmanship, the site establishes credibility and encourages potential clients to reach out.

Screenshot of Blade Carpentry's website featuring a clean design, service offerings in outdoor carpentry like decks and verandahs, and a prominent contact section.
Blade Carpentry’s website showcases their outdoor carpentry expertise with a professional layout and clear service breakdown, helping build trust and attract clients | Source: Blade Carpentry
Veenhoven Constructions’ website

The Veenhoven Constructions website effectively attracts clients with its clear focus on decking, patios, and general carpentry services, supported by over 15 years of experience. The site’s clean design highlights their expertise, with well-organised service categories, professional imagery showcasing completed projects, and a user-friendly layout. 

Key features like a free quote option, visible contact details, and an emphasis on local areas served (Redland Bay, Victoria Point, and Brisbane) make it easy for potential clients to connect. This combination of credibility, transparency, and high-quality visuals establishes trust and encourages inquiries.

Screenshot of Veenhoven Constructions' website featuring a clean and organised design, a completed decking project image, and a navigation menu for services like patios and carpentry.
Veenhoven Constructions’ website highlights their over 15 years of expertise with well-organised service categories, a user-friendly layout, and professional visuals to establish trust and attract inquiries | Source: Veenhoven Constructions

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for carpentry businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for carpentry services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your carpentry expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

Screenshot of a Oneflare profile page featuring Maryous Building and Construction Pty Ltd, with details on qualifications, reviews, and a sidebar for client inquiries.
Posting on lead generation platforms like Oneflare helps carpentry businesses connect with clients searching for tailored services, providing an efficient way to attract leads and grow your business | Source: Maryous Building And Construction

Get started on Oneflare by registering your carpentry business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

Google search results for 'cabinets & carpentry wangara' displaying various cabinet maker businesses, including Oneflare.
Utilising SEO and paid search can significantly boost your carpentry business’s online visibility, helping attract targeted traffic and generate quality leads | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your carpentry services and client works visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a carpentry business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

Wild Crew Carpentry  – Facebook advertising

Wild Crew Carpentry’s Facebook page effectively attracts clients through high-quality project images that showcase their carpentry skills, such as custom furniture, outdoor structures, and renovations. Their Facebook page shows ongoing projects, helping build trust with potential customers. They have also strategically added their contact details and website link, making it easy for users to enquire or request quotes. 

Screenshot of Wild Crew Carpentry's Facebook page featuring their logo, contact details, project images, and service offerings such as custom furniture, outdoor structures, and renovations.
Wild Crew Carpentry leverages Facebook advertising to showcase their carpentry projects and services, connecting effectively with potential clients while highlighting their craftsmanship and professionalism | Source: Wild Crew Carpentry
Berbuilt Constructions – Instagram advertising

BerBuilt Constructions uses their Instagram page to feature high-quality images of their completed projects, including decking, cladding, kitchen renovations, and outdoor carpentry. The clean layout and well-organised story highlights allow visitors to quickly view their expertise and range of services. 

The page’s visuals highlight professional craftsmanship, while contact details and location information in the bio make it easy for clients to connect. This combination of detailed project imagery, clear service categories, and direct communication options makes the page highly effective in building trust and generating leads.

BerBuilt Constructions' Instagram profile displaying their bio, contact details, services offered, and story highlights featuring categories such as EkoDeck, cladding, privacy screens, internal projects, and decking.
BerBuilt Constructions effectively uses Instagram to showcase their carpentry expertise, featuring project categories like decking and kitchen renovations | Source: Berbuilt Constructions
Sydney Carpentry Group  – TikTok advertising

Sydney Carpentry Group’s TikTok strategy combines cinematic visuals with powerful music and engaging on-site content to showcase their carpentry work. Their use of drone footage highlights the scale and quality of their work, making it easy for viewers to envision similar carpentry jobs for their homes or businesses.

Additionally, their videos featuring carpenters working on projects add a relatable and behind-the-scenes element. By showing their work in action, they show their expertise, hard work, and attention to detail, which helps build trust with potential clients.

Sydney Carpentry Group TikTok profile displaying videos of carpentry projects, including drone footage and on-site work. The account has over 5,500 followers and 66.5K likes.
Sydney Carpentry Group effectively uses TikTok to showcase their carpentry expertise with engaging visuals, including drone footage and on-site work | Source: Sydney Carpentry Group

Build your carpentry business’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new carpentry clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

A screenshot of Oneflare reviews showcasing customer feedback for carpentry services, highlighting positive reviews and replies from the business. Includes details like job type and location.
Building a strong reputation is essential for long-term success in the carpentry industry. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new customers | Source: Absolute Building & Renovations

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win carpentry jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks.

Step 10: Get paid for your carpentry services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your carpentry services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a hand pressing the 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen to complete an online payment.
Simplify payments for your carpentry services by offering secure and convenient online payment options for your clients | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a carpentry business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable carpentry services invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free carpentry invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s carpentry invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's carpentry invoice templates, showing options to share, download, or print invoices for clients.
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing carpentry invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s carpentry invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for different businesses, like carpentry businesses. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for carpentry services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s carpentry invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help carpentry businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s carpentry invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organized layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for carpentry businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking carpentry services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Build your future — start growing your carpentry business today!

Starting a carpentry business in Australia can be a rewarding journey when you take the right steps. From identifying your niche and setting competitive rates to showcasing your work and attracting clients, success comes down to planning and connecting with the right opportunities.

Take the next step by registering your business on Oneflare. Join a platform where homeowners and businesses actively search for skilled carpenters like you. Sign up today, showcase your services, and start growing your carpentry business with confidence!


FAQs on how to start a carpentry business

How do you deal with wood waste?

Dealing with wood waste effectively is important for both cost management and sustainability. You can repurpose offcuts for smaller projects like furniture or joinery work, recycle clean wood waste for mulch or compost, or donate usable scraps to local community projects or schools. 

For larger waste, partnering with recycling facilities and waste management solutions inlike Cleanaway and Veolia, ensures responsible disposal while reducing environmental impact.

What is the difference between a subcontractor and a full-time employee?

A subcontractor is an independent worker hired to complete specific tasks or projects, often bringing their own tools and managing their own schedule. They’re not entitled to employee benefits like sick leave, superannuation, or holiday pay. 

In contrast, a full-time employee works directly for your business under an employment contract, typically receiving a fixed wage, benefits, and a regular schedule. Choosing between the two depends on your workload, budget, and business structure.

How much does it cost to start a carpentry business?

The cost to start a carpentry business can range from $5,000 to $15,000, depending on the tools, equipment, and services you plan to offer. Basic costs include purchasing essential tools (e.g., saws, drills, and sanders), safety gear, and materials, as well as setting up insurance, marketing, and a vehicle for transport. Starting small and investing gradually as you take on more projects can help manage costs effectively.

 

Categories
Business guides

How to start a flooring business

Starting a flooring business in Australia can be a great way to build a steady income, but it’s not without its challenges, especially when working with limited resources. If you’re starting a flooring company from the ground up, you’ll need practical strategies to attract clients and manage your business effectively.

This guide will help you get started on how to start a flooring business, from identifying your market and deciding on your rates, to securing your first clients. With the right approach, you can build a solid reputation and achieve long-term success in the flooring industry.

Step 1: Identify the market of your flooring business

Identifying your market is the first step to ensuring your flooring business meets the needs of your local community. By understanding which flooring services are in demand, you can tailor your offerings to attract the right clients and stand out from the competition.

Explore different types of flooring services

Here, we’ll explore the various types of flooring services you can offer, so you can identify which ones align with your skills and the needs of your community.

Floor installation services

Floor installation is the most common service for new builds or renovations. You can specialise in installing a variety of flooring types, including hardwood, laminate, floating timber floors, vinyl, or tiles, catering to residential and small commercial projects.

Interior of a house under renovation with unfinished flooring, showcasing preparation for professional floor installation.
Professional floor installation services can transform any space, enhancing both functionality and aesthetic appeal | Source: Stokes, Mark

Floor refinishing services

Floor refinishing services restore the beauty of worn-out floors by sanding, polishing, and sealing surfaces to make them look new. This service is especially in demand for hardwood floors that show signs of wear and tear.

Floor restoration services

Floor restoration involves repairing and restoring damaged floors, including repairing cracks or replacing damaged tiles. This service appeals to homeowners who want to maintain the integrity of their floors without having to replace them entirely.

Tile and grout cleaning

Professional tiling and grout cleaning are essential for maintaining the cleanliness and longevity of tiled floors. Offering this service can be a great way to attract clients looking for routine maintenance or restoring the appearance of older tile floors.

Floor sanding services

Floor sanding is a type of service used to remove old finishes and smooth out imperfections on wooden floors. This service is particularly beneficial for older homes with hardwood floors that need a bit of floor restoration and refresh work to look vibrant again.

Living space with newly sanded and polished wooden floors, reflecting natural light through large glass doors.
Professional floor sanding brings out the natural beauty of wood, adding shine and durability to your space | Source: Mr Timber Floor Sanding

Epoxy flooring services

Epoxy flooring provides a durable, long-lasting finish, ideal for garage floor coating, warehouse floor upgrades, and other floor renovations for high-traffic areas. This service requires specialised skills but can be highly profitable, particularly in commercial settings.

Floor levelling services

Floor levelling corrects uneven floors before installing new flooring. It’s an important service for clients who want to ensure their floors are properly prepared to avoid future problems.

Carpet removal and replacement

Carpet removal and replacement is a practical service for homeowners looking to upgrade their floors or switch to a different type of flooring. You can offer this service as part of a full home makeover or as an independent job.

Floor waterproofing and sealing

Floor waterproofing and sealing floors are crucial for areas prone to moisture, such as basements, bathrooms, or kitchens. Offering this service adds value by helping homeowners protect their investments from water damage.

Custom floor design and inlays

Custom floor design and inlays involve creating unique floor patterns or adding decorative elements to enhance the aesthetic of a space. This service appeals to clients looking for a more personalised or high-end flooring option.

Choose your flooring business niche

Once you’ve identified the types of flooring services you want to offer, the next step is to narrow down your focus to a specific niche. By specialising, you can build expertise, attract the right clients, and differentiate your business from competitors. Consider the following flooring business niches:

Floor refinishing and restoration niche

The floor refinishing and restoration niche focuses on the restoration and reinforcement of older buildings by sanding, polishing, and repairing their floors. The services under this niche are commonly used for hardwood floors, tile, and stone surfaces to improve their quality and durability, keeping them in excellent condition.

  • Pros: High demand for budget-friendly flooring solutions.
  • Cons: This can require more time and effort than new installations and may require specialised tools and training.

Luxury and custom flooring niche

The luxury and custom flooring niche focuses on high-end, bespoke installations, such as intricate designs, premium materials, and unique flooring solutions. This niche appeals to clients who want something distinctive for their homes or businesses.

  • Pros: Higher profit margins and the opportunity to build a strong brand.
  • Cons: Smaller client base as it targets higher-end markets, and requires premium materials and advanced skills.
Modern luxury bathroom with grey tiled floors, a freestanding bathtub, wooden vanity with dual round mirrors, and a sleek glass shower enclosure.
Explore the luxury and custom flooring niche to cater to high-end clients seeking sophistication and style | Source: River City Constructions

Commercial and industrial flooring niche

The commercial and industrial flooring niche caters to businesses, warehouses, and factories that need durable, long-lasting flooring solutions. Services can include epoxy coatings, tile installations, and large-scale carpeting.

  • Pros: Steady demand from commercial properties and larger projects.
  • Cons: Larger projects often require higher upfront investment in equipment and materials, and longer working hours.

Tile and grout cleaning and maintenance niche

Tile and grout cleaning services involve restoring the appearance of tiled surfaces and removing dirt, stains, and build-up. The services under this niche are often sought after in both residential and commercial settings, where cleanliness and maintenance are priorities.

  • Pros: Consistent demand for maintenance services and lower start-up costs.
  • Cons: Can be physically demanding and may require specialised cleaning equipment.

Eco-friendly flooring niche

The eco-friendly flooring niche focuses on sustainable, environmentally conscious flooring options such as bamboo, cork flooring, and reclaimed wood. With growing awareness of environmental issues, this niche appeals to clients seeking green building solutions.

  • Pros: Appeal to eco-conscious consumers and increasing demand for sustainable options.
  • Cons: Limited range of materials, and some eco-friendly options can be more expensive than traditional flooring types.

Decide on the service area for your flooring business

Determining where to establish or expand your flooring business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for flooring services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for flooring services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional flooring in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Flooring Job Demand
Flooring services in Sydney23.2%
Flooring services in Melbourne22.3%
Flooring services in Brisbane15.1%
Flooring services in Perth14.5%
Flooring services in Gold Coast3.6%

Australian cities with the highest flooring job demand

Sydney leads the market with 23.2% of the total job demand for flooring services in Australia. This high demand is primarily driven by its significant population, large-scale residential developments, and consistent growth in the commercial property market. With ongoing renovations and new builds in one of Australia’s busiest urban centres, the demand for flooring specialists remains high.

Melbourne follows closely with a 22.3% share of the total job demand. As a rapidly growing metropolitan area, Melbourne’s demand for flooring services is driven by urban expansion, renovations in older suburbs, and a thriving housing market. Its vibrant property scene ensures sustained demand for both residential and commercial flooring solutions.

Brisbane accounts for 15.1% of the demand, making it a strong contender. The city’s growing appeal to families and businesses, coupled with increased construction activity, has elevated the demand for quality flooring. Its relative affordability compared to Sydney and Melbourne also supports consistent activity in the housing market, influencing flooring services.

Australian cities with lower flooring job demand

Perth, with a 14.5% share, represents a mid-tier market for flooring services. While demand is not as high as Sydney or Melbourne, Perth’s steady population growth and increased focus on urban redevelopment projects make it a viable market. Flooring businesses can focus on niche areas such as sustainable flooring or luxury vinyl to differentiate themselves.

The Gold Coast holds a smaller share of 3.6%, reflecting its role as a more lifestyle-oriented city. Though overall demand is lower, businesses can tap into niche opportunities in luxury and holiday home flooring, as well as renovations driven by a strong tourism market. The smaller market also reduces competition, allowing businesses to build loyal customer bases.

Understanding seasonal trends in the flooring industry is essential for managing fluctuations in demand and optimising operations. Certain times of the year may see an increase in client requests, such as spring and summer, when homeowners prioritise renovations and flooring upgrades. Other periods may experience a slowdown.

By aligning your services with seasonal needs—such as promoting floor refinishing services in winter or advertising outdoor flooring solutions like decking installations in spring—you can maintain steady revenue and ensure the long-term stability of your flooring business, regardless of demand fluctuations.

Modern kitchen with light wood flooring, a sleek island counter with bar stools, and a green logo displaying 'Natro: Bring Nature to Metro.
Plan for seasonal trends in the flooring industry to align your services with customer demands | Source: Natro Flooring

Identify popular seasons for flooring services

According to Oneflare’s 2024 data on the total job postings for each type of service, the top three peak months for the flooring business in Australia are March, April, and October. These months exhibit the highest demand across various flooring services.

The increased demand in March and April is closely linked to the end of summer and the start of cooler months, a period when homeowners often undertake renovation projects, including flooring upgrades, before winter sets in. October marks the beginning of the warmer spring season, prompting property owners to complete home improvement projects, often driven by the anticipation of holiday gatherings or real estate sales.

Peak season for flooring installation

Flooring installation shows the highest demand in January, March, and April. In January, property owners take advantage of the summer holiday season to complete renovations. March and April follow as ideal times to install flooring due to favourable weather conditions.

Peak season for tiling installation

The peak months for tiling installation are March, April, and May. During these months, the demand is driven by property renovations, with homeowners and commercial establishments focusing on upgrading kitchens, bathrooms, and outdoor areas, especially ahead of winter in May.

Peak season for grout cleaning

Grout cleaning has peak demand in March, May, and December. March and May align with seasonal cleaning and renovation cycles, while December represents a last-minute push before year-end celebrations to ensure spaces are clean and well-maintained.

Peak season for flooring repair

Flooring repair peaks in January, April, and September. January reflects the post-holiday period when homeowners address wear and tear. April is popular for general renovations before winter, while September sees a surge as property owners prepare their homes for the spring season and upcoming holiday activities.

Peak season for carpet cleaning

Carpet cleaning experiences its highest demand in March, May, and November. March and May coincide with seasonal cleaning routines, especially before and after the cooler months. November aligns with preparations for the festive season, as homeowners and businesses focus on maintaining clean and presentable spaces for holiday gatherings.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

Seasonal changes can greatly impact the demand for flooring services, with peak times during home renovation seasons or before major holidays. Planning ahead for these fluctuations can help ensure that your flooring business remains steady throughout the year, maintaining a reliable income stream even during quieter months.

Offer seasonal promotions and discounts for certain flooring services

Seasonal promotions can be a great way to attract clients during off-peak times. For example, you can offer discounts on floor refinishing services during the colder months when people are spending more time indoors or provide package deals for new floor installations in the spring. Seasonal offers encourage clients to book services during slower periods and keep your business active year-round.

Diversify your flooring service offerings

Expanding your service offerings can help keep your business going throughout the year. If you experience a drop in new flooring installations during the off-season, consider offering related services like floor cleaning, sanding, or restoration. By diversifying your flooring services, you can appeal to different client needs and avoid relying too heavily on one service.

Build relationships with builders, interior designers, or renovation contractors

Collaborating with builders, interior designers, and renovation contractors can help smooth out seasonal fluctuations. These professionals are often working on projects throughout the year and can refer you for flooring installations or other services. Building these partnerships ensures that you have a steady stream of business, even in slower months.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring clients needing regular flooring services

Using lead generation platforms like Oneflare can help you secure consistent work throughout the year. By regularly updating your profile and responding to service requests, you can attract clients who need recurring services like floor maintenance or repair. These platforms keep your business visible and help fill your schedule, even during off-peak seasons.

Screenshot of a lead generation page on Oneflare featuring top-rated flooring experts, including ABC Flooring and All Star Timber, with ratings and detailed service descriptions.
Post your flooring business on lead generation sites like Oneflare to attract recurring clients who require regular services | Source: Oneflare

Register your flooring business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted flooring experts like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the flooring industry

Understanding the market rates and analysing your competitors is key to pricing your services competitively while ensuring you remain profitable. By researching how much most floor installers charge for their businesses, you can better position yourself in the market and make informed decisions about your pricing strategies.

Understand the cost of common flooring services

There are many factors that affect the cost of flooring services. There are the type of flooring, the complexity of the project, and the region in which you operate. The cost also depends on whether you’re offering basic installation or more specialised services like sanding or epoxy coatings.

To give you a better idea, here’s an overview of how much most flooring services cost in Australia:

Type of Flooring ServiceAverage Cost Range (per m²)
General flooring cost$80 to $200
Floor refinishing cost$25 to $50
Floor restoration cost$25 to $50
Laminate flooring installation cost$25 to $80
Timber flooring installation cost$30 to $100
Vinyl flooring installation cost$25 to $50
Linoleum flooring installation cost$30 to $60
Tile flooring installation cost$35 to $120
Carpet installation cost$60 to $150
Floor sanding cost$25 to $50
Epoxy flooring cost$30 to $100
Floating floor installation cost$20 to $90

Do take note that these figures are simply estimates, and prices may vary based on location, the scale of the job, and the materials used. By understanding these ranges, you can assess how your pricing compares to the local market and adjust accordingly.

Decide how to charge for flooring services

Choosing the right pricing structure depends on the type of work you’re doing. Consider the following methods to determine how you charge for flooring services:

Per square metre for larger flooring projects

For larger projects, such as installing new floors in a house or commercial space, charging per square metre is a standard approach. This method provides clarity for clients and allows you to scale your pricing based on the size of the project, ensuring that larger jobs are adequately priced. It also makes it easier to estimate costs upfront, helping clients make informed decisions.

Flat rates for smaller and specific flooring jobs

For smaller tasks like repairs or installations of specific flooring types (e.g., carpets or tiles), offering a flat rate can make it easier for clients to understand the total cost upfront. It also simplifies invoicing for straightforward projects, ensuring no hidden costs or surprises for the client. Flat rates are particularly useful for repeat customers, as they can quickly compare prices for similar jobs.

Hourly rate for intricate and unpredictable flooring services

For services that require more detailed work, such as floor sanding or restoration, an hourly rate may be appropriate. This method is ideal for projects where the scope of work is harder to estimate in advance, allowing you to be compensated fairly for your time and expertise. 

Hourly rates can be beneficial for jobs that may have unexpected challenges or require a level of skill that’s hard to predict.

Project-based pricing for flooring projects with multiple phases

For larger or more complex projects that involve several stages, such as demolition, preparation, floor installation, and finishing, project-based pricing can be effective. This method ensures that all aspects of the project are covered and helps clients understand the overall cost structure. 

It also provides the opportunity to build in contingencies for unexpected costs, ensuring your flooring business is protected throughout the project.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

To stand out in a competitive flooring market, it’s essential to identify and promote your unique selling points (USPs). These are the key features or services that differentiate your business from others, helping you attract the right clients. Here are some ideas to consider:

Eco-friendly flooring solutions

Eco-friendly flooring options, such as bamboo or reclaimed wood, are becoming increasingly popular as consumers seek sustainable choices. Offering eco-friendly options can attract environmentally conscious clients and differentiate your business from competitors. 

Additionally, it positions your business as one that aligns with current trends and consumer values, enhancing your brand’s reputation.

Customised flooring designs and finishes

Offering customised floor designs or specialised finishes, like hand-stained hardwood floors or intricate tile patterns, can appeal to clients looking for a unique touch. This helps position your business as a premium provider of bespoke services, allowing you to target a higher-end market. Clients seeking one-of-a-kind solutions will appreciate your attention to detail and craftsmanship.

End-to-end flooring service

Providing an all-inclusive service, from initial consultation to project completion, can be a strong USP. This convenience saves clients time and hassle, as they only need to work with one company for the entire flooring project. It also ensures that the client receives consistent service and quality across all stages of the project, making their experience smoother and more enjoyable.

Fast turnaround times and flexible scheduling

Promoting quick response times and flexible scheduling can be a key selling point, especially for clients who need urgent flooring services. This level of flexibility can set you apart from competitors with longer lead times, making your business the go-to choice for clients in a rush. Additionally, it allows you to work with a wider range of clients, including those with tight deadlines or last-minute requests.

Screenshot of a Oneflare profile highlighting unique selling points such as expertise in concreting, landscaping, tiling, and excavation, along with 15+ years of experience and a reputation for quality workmanship.
Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your flooring business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: AS Concrete

Step 4: Explore funding options for your flooring business

Securing funding for your flooring business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business professional discussing funding options with a client, holding a document and pen at a desk with a laptop in the background
Exploring funding options is a key step in starting your flooring business, ensuring you have the resources to launch and grow successfully | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial flooring business supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your flooring business, like vehicles, flooring tools, and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup flooring businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic flooring business plan

Starting a flooring business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

A flooring expert reviewing a detailed business plan document with charts and graphs, sitting at a desk with a laptop in the background
Developing a strategic flooring business plan is essential for setting clear goals, outlining growth strategies, and achieving long-term success | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your flooring business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your flooring business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your flooring business description

Your flooring business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your flooring business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your flooring business niche and types of services

The next step is to define the focus of your flooring business, whether it’s general flooring installations, refinishing and restoration, tile and grout cleaning, or a specialised niche such as eco-friendly flooring solutions or custom design and inlays.

Clarify why you chose this niche and provide a brief description of your target market. For example, your target audience could include homeowners needing durable and stylish flooring installations, businesses seeking large-scale commercial flooring solutions, or clients looking for specialised offerings like sustainable materials, bespoke designs, or fast-response repair services.

Bathroom floor and wall tiling featuring intricate blue-and-white patterned tiles on the floor and white subway tiles with dark grout on the walls.
Detailing your flooring business niche and service offerings—like tiling, hardwood flooring, or specialty designs—is a crucial step in creating a comprehensive and effective business plan | Source: BNG Tiling Services

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and flooring business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your flooring services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of flooring services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a flooring business, such as injuries from handling heavy materials or equipment, slips and falls during installations, and accidental damage to property during floor removal or refinishing. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance or workers’ compensation insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new flooring services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your flooring business

To start a flooring business, you may need to obtain registrations, flooring business licenses, and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government.

Step 7: Hire your flooring experts and specialists

Building a reliable team for your flooring business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire flooring experts and specialists and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A flooring professional installing tiles on a bathroom floor, surrounded by tools, grout buckets, and a laser level for precision alignment.
Hiring skilled flooring experts is essential to ensuring the quality and success of your flooring business | Source: No Mess Property Maintenance Services

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as installing new flooring, refinishing or restoring existing floors, or repairing damaged floorboards) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and find the right flooring experts and specialists for your business, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, flooring skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask how they managed challenging flooring projects in the past, dealt with unexpected complications such as uneven subfloors or intricate designs, or met tight deadlines while delivering high-quality flooring results and ensuring customer satisfaction.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your flooring specialists will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Start with training sessions to introduce them to your flooring business’s standards, client communication protocols, and the specific workflows or tools they’ll use to ensure efficient and high-quality flooring services.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your staff. 

Step 8: Invest in the right flooring tools and equipment

To deliver high-quality flooring services, investing in the right tools and equipment is crucial. By being equipped with the right gear, you will stand out as a flooring business that’s efficient, precise, and professional. 

Each flooring business niche requires specialised tools and equipment. Here’s a breakdown of key items, their estimated costs, and where to purchase them in Australia:

Flooring Tools and EquipmentPrice Range Where to Buy
Flooring cutters and trimmers$50 – $300Bunnings
Floor sanders$1,000 – $5,000Kevmor
Moisture meters$150 – $500Floor Trade Supplies
Knee kickers$100 – $250Intafloors
Adhesive trowels$20 – $80Imperial Flooring Australia
Tile levelling systems$30 – $150Bunnings
Floor rollers$100 – $400Kevmor
Carpet stretchers$200 – $600Intafloors
Safety gear (gloves, goggles, etc.)$20 – $150Bunnings

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary depending on retailers, brands, and product quality.

Step 9: Find clients for your flooring business

By now, you likely have a clear understanding of your market and have set your pricing structure. The next step is to secure your first clients. Whether it’s through your website, social media, or word-of-mouth referrals, there are many ways to get your business in front of the right people.

Expand your online presence

A strong online presence is vital for finding flooring leads and establishing your business as trustworthy. Clients are more likely to search online for flooring services before making a decision, so it’s essential to ensure your business is easy to find and offers clear information on your services.

Build your flooring business website

A website is essential for establishing your flooring business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful flooring business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

The Flooring Guys

The Flooring Guys’ website features a clean and professional design that effectively highlights their expertise in hybrid flooring and related services. Right from the homepage, they emphasise their specialisation, showcasing high-quality images of their flooring products alongside clear pricing details.

The navigation is straightforward, making it easy for visitors to explore their product offerings or learn more about their services. The inclusion of customer testimonials, such as their “150+ 5-star reviews” on Trustpilot, adds credibility and reassures visitors of the company’s reliability and service quality.

Homepage of The Flooring Guys’ website showcasing hybrid flooring options and competitive pricing for quality flooring products.
Having an intuitive and visually appealing site like The Flooring Guys helps attract customers, promote your expertise, and drive business growth in the competitive flooring industry | Source: The Flooring Guys
MTE Floors

MTE Floors’ website features a clean and professional design that effectively highlights their expertise in wooden flooring solutions. They showcase their specialisation by presenting high-quality images of various flooring options, including laminate, hybrid, engineered, and solid timber flooring. 

The website has clear menus, directing visitors to detailed service pages, a gallery of past projects, and informative blog posts. Contact information, including phone numbers and an email address, is prominently displayed at the top of the page, and a dedicated ‘Contact Us’ section provides an easy-to-use form for inquiries.

Homepage of MTE Floors’ website highlighting their innovative flooring solutions and professional services, with a modern design and a 'Request a Quote' button for user convenience.
MTE Floors’ website demonstrates the importance of a sleek, user-friendly platform for flooring businesses | Source: MTE Floors
Top Choice Flooring Installation

Top Choice Flooring Installation’s website features a user-friendly design that immediately highlights their expertise in handling different flooring materials, such as vinyl, laminate, and hybrid options. 

What sets this site apart is the detailed descriptions accompanying each flooring type, helping potential clients make informed decisions. The website also emphasises its additional services, such as subfloor preparation and dust-free grinding, positioning them as a comprehensive solution for flooring needs.

Homepage of Top Choice Flooring Installation’s website featuring a modern interior design image, a tagline 'Your dream floor, made easy,' and a prominent 'Get A Free Estimate' button.
Adding a clear call-to-action, professional visuals, and concise messaging to your website makes it easy for potential clients to engage and request services | Source: Top Choice Flooring Installation

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for flooring businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for flooring services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your flooring expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

Triple Tree Timber Flooring profile on Oneflare showcasing qualifications, business details, customer reviews, and a 'Get free quotes' option for lead generation.
Posting on lead-generation platforms like Oneflare is one of the most effective ways for flooring businesses to attract and secure new clients | Source: Triple Tree Timber Flooring

Get started on Oneflare by registering your flooring business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

Google search results for 'flooring experts in Melbourne,' featuring a Oneflare listing and related questions for SEO optimisation.
Investing in SEO and paid search campaigns helps increase your flooring business’s online visibility | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your flooring services and client works visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a flooring business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

Tommy Hawkins Flooring – Facebook advertising

Tommy Hawkins Flooring’s Facebook page uses a straightforward marketing approach by regularly posting photos and videos of their completed flooring projects. Each post is accompanied by concise captions detailing the materials used and the location of the project, effectively showcasing their expertise. 

Their consistent posting schedule featuring a variety of flooring types, including vinyl planks, hybrid flooring, and carpet tiles, proves their versatility in the field and appeals to a broad range of potential clients. 

Tommy Hawkins Flooring Facebook page showcasing projects, client reviews, and business details for effective online advertising.
Leverage Facebook to showcase your flooring business’s completed projects and connect with local customers | Source: Tommy Hawkins Flooring
MLB Flooring – Instagram advertising

MLB Flooring’s Instagram account is filled with high-quality photos and videos, highlighting their completed projects, such as hybrid flooring, vinyl planks, and custom designs. They also take advantage of Instagram’s story highlights to feature ongoing projects, which help build trust and provide added value to their followers.

The account keeps its content simple and focused, relying on polished visuals and occasional reels showcasing their work. This approach, combined with consistent posting and authentic engagement with followers, makes the page appealing to potential clients looking for reliable flooring services.

MLB Flooring Instagram profile showcasing completed flooring projects, including hybrid, timber, and herringbone styles, with highlights and posts for customer engagement.
Use Instagram advertising to showcase your flooring business’s expertise through high-quality visuals and detailed project highlights | Source: Mlb Flooring
LV.TimberFlooring – TikTok advertising

LV.TimberFlooring’s TikTok account uses an engaging content strategy that combines project showcases with trending audio and effects. Their videos often feature time-lapse transformations of flooring installations, behind-the-scenes clips, and close-ups of their high-quality timber finishes.

Their content is visually appealing and highlights the craftsmanship of their work. Plus, incorporating TikTok trends, such as popular music and creative transitions, makes their content more shareable and engaging. This strategy allows them to reach a wider audience and stand out in the competitive flooring market, proving the effectiveness of TikTok in showcasing their expertise to potential clients.

LV.TimberFlooring TikTok profile featuring videos of timber flooring installations and educational content for viewers.
Maximise your flooring business’s reach with TikTok advertising | Source: LV.TimberFlooring

Build your flooring business’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new flooring clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

Screenshot of customer reviews for Milestone Flooring on Oneflare, highlighting client satisfaction with flooring installation services in Brunswick East, VIC.
Positive reviews help attract new clients and establish your reputation for quality workmanship | Source: Milestone Flooring

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win flooring jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks. 

Step 10: Get paid for your flooring services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your flooring services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a hand pressing the 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen to complete an online payment.
Simplify payments for your flooring services by offering secure and convenient online payment options for your clients | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a flooring business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable flooring services invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free flooring invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s flooring invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's flooring invoice templates, showing options to share, download, or print invoices for clients.
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing flooring invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s flooring invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for different businesses, like flooring businesses. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for flooring services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s flooring invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help flooring businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s flooring invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organized layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for flooring businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking flooring services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Build the foundation of your dream—start your flooring business today!

Becoming a trusted flooring professional gives you the chance to help clients transform their spaces, whether it’s enhancing a family’s home with stylish, durable flooring or upgrading an office space with modern, functional designs. In this guide, we’ve outlined everything you need to start and succeed in the flooring industry, and how you can find and secure your first flooring business clients.

If you’re ready to grow your flooring business, register your business on Oneflare and connect with homeowners and businesses actively seeking reliable flooring professionals. By creating a profile, you can showcase your expertise, attract new clients, and establish lasting relationships in your community.

Don’t wait to take your business to the next level—join Oneflare today!


FAQs on how to start a flooring business

How can I manage cash flow effectively during slow seasons?

Managing cash flow during slow seasons requires strategic planning. Build a financial buffer by saving a portion of your earnings during busier months. Offer seasonal promotions or discounts to attract clients during quieter periods. Additionally, diversify your services, such as providing maintenance or repair work, to maintain a steady income stream year-round.

What’s the best way to build partnerships with interior designers or builders?

Start by networking at local events or trade shows where industry professionals gather. Reach out to interior designers and builders with a professional pitch, showcasing your portfolio and how your services complement theirs. 

You might also want to consider offering referral incentives or collaborating on joint projects to establish mutually beneficial partnerships. Maintaining good communication and consistently delivering high-quality work will help strengthen these relationships over time.

How much does it cost to start a flooring business?

The cost of starting a flooring business can vary, but typically ranges between $5,000 and $50,000, depending on the scale. Initial expenses may include purchasing tools and equipment, such as saws and sanders, a reliable vehicle for transporting materials, marketing costs, and any required licenses or insurance. Starting small with essential tools and gradually expanding can help manage initial costs effectively.

Categories
Business guides

How to start an event planning business

We are now becoming more accustomed to hosting and attending events here and there. From weddings, and grand birthdays, to year-end parties, more and more people want to organise memorable parties and events that will leave a long-lasting impression on their guests. But the thing is, not everyone can plan an event, and that’s where you can come in.

If you are wondering how to start an event planning business, you’ve come to the right place. This article will give you a comprehensive guide on how to build your business from scratch and insights on how to get clients for event planning business so your efforts don’t go to waste.

Step 1: Identify the market of your event planning business

The first thing you need to do is figure out your target market. Do you want to be an overall event and party planner? Or would you rather focus on planning wedding events? The clearer it is for you, the better you can tailor your services and market yourself accordingly.

Explore different types of event planning services

There are different types of event planning jobs and services you can offer, and each one requires a different set of skills and expertise. Here are some of the most common ones:

Corporate event planning

Corporate event planning involves organising events for companies, such as conferences, seminars, product launches, team-building activities, and corporate parties. These events are typically aimed at promoting the company’s brand, products or services, fostering team spirit, or providing networking opportunities.

Wedding planning 

Wedding planning is a specialised service that involves organising and coordinating all aspects of a wedding ceremony and reception. It’s a complex and multifaceted task that requires meticulous attention to detail, excellent organisational skills, and the ability to manage multiple vendors and timelines simultaneously.

One of the most crucial aspects of successful wedding planning business includes hiring event staff who know how to handle the high-pressure environment of a wedding day. From the wedding coordinator to the catering staff, every team member must be professional, attentive, and able to anticipate and address any issues that may arise.

A bride and groom smiling in a scenic outdoor setting with their bridal party dressed in formal attire walking in the background
Wedding planning is a specialised type of event planning, requiring attention to detail, creativity, and organisational expertise to create unforgettable moments | Source: Buchanan, Natalie

Social event planning

Social event planning is a bit more versatile and can include organising birthday parties, anniversary celebrations, retirement parties, and other personal or community events. Social event planners need to have a keen eye for detail and creativity. Unlike weddings and corporate events, social events are often more casual and relaxed, allowing for more flexibility in terms of planning and execution.

Fundraising and charity event planning

Organising a fundraising or charity event involves planning and creating an experience that inspires generosity while meeting the practical goals of raising funds. It often includes planning galas, auctions, marathons, or community fairs that align with the mission of the organisation. Strong storytelling skills and the ability to engage sponsors, donors, and participants are essential for the success of this event planning service.

Festival and concert event planning

Planning festivals and concerts is all about creating an unforgettable experience for a large audience. This type of event planning often requires coordinating with entertainers and performers, managing ticket sales, and ensuring smooth logistics like stage setup, sound systems, and crowd control. 

A live band performing on stage under vibrant lighting at a festival or concert event, with musicians playing various instruments.
Planning festivals and concerts involves managing performances, staging, and lighting to deliver a seamless and memorable experience for attendees | Source: Mickey Shake

Sports and recreational event planning 

Sports and recreational event planning focuses on organising activities like tournaments, marathons, or family fun days. It involves collaborating with teams, venues, and sponsors to ensure the event runs smoothly and meets its objectives. This type of event planning service needs excellent time management and a clear understanding of safety regulations and participant expectations.

Virtual and hybrid event planning 

Virtual and hybrid events blend technology with traditional event planning to engage audiences in person and online. These might include webinars, virtual conferences, or hybrid networking events that require advanced tech tools for live streaming and interaction. A deep understanding of digital platforms and a focus on participant engagement are key skills for planning this modern type of event.

Luxury event planning 

Luxury event planning caters to high-end clients seeking bespoke experiences, such as upscale weddings, private galas, or exclusive parties. It requires a deep understanding of premium vendors, personalised touches, and attention to every detail to deliver elegance and sophistication. Building strong client relationships and having an impeccable sense of style are must-haves for this service.

Destination event planning 

Destination event planning involves organising events in unique or far locations, often requiring coordination across time zones and languages. From finding local vendors to managing travel logistics for attendees, this service will cover a wide range of responsibilities to ensure a seamless experience. It’s perfect for event planners who love travel and excel at adapting to new environments and cultures.

Choose your event planning business niche

Now that you have a more comprehensive understanding of the different types of event planning services, it’s time to choose a niche that aligns with your interests, skills, and target market. Specialising in a specific area can help you stand out from competitors and become an expert in your field. 

Corporate event planning niche

If you choose to join the corporate event planning market, you’ll likely work with companies and organisations to plan conferences, meetings, team-building activities, and other business-oriented events. This niche is ideal if you enjoy working in a structured environment, have strong organisational skills, and are comfortable managing budgets and logistics.

  • Pros: Stable income from working with established companies, opportunities to plan large-scale, high-budget events, potential for long-term contracts and repeat business
  • Cons: Strict budgets and approval processes, less creative freedom due to corporate guidelines, demands for flawless execution with little room for error

Wedding and romantic event planning niche 

Wedding and romantic event planning is perfect if you thrive on creating memorable, emotionally charged experiences. This niche allows you to work closely with couples to bring their dream celebrations to life, from intimate elopements to lavish weddings. 

  • Pros: Creative freedom to design highly personalised events, opportunities to build long-lasting relationships with clients, emotionally rewarding work
  • Cons: High-stress environments with demanding clients and tight timelines, potential for long hours and weekend work during peak seasons, navigating family dynamics and differing visions from multiple stakeholders

Social and lifestyle event planning niche 

If you’re more into fun and celebratory events, the social and lifestyle event planning niche might be the perfect fit. From milestone birthdays and anniversaries to product launches and charity galas, you’ll have the opportunity to create unforgettable experiences for a wide range of clients. 

  • Pros: Creative freedom to design unique and innovative events, opportunities to work with diverse clients and event themes, potential for high-profile events with celebrities or influencers
  • Cons: Unpredictable workload with seasonal fluctuations, clients may have unrealistic expectations or limited budgets, increased competition in major urban areas
A percussionist performing alongside a saxophonist at a vibrant social event in a stylish, illuminated venue.
The social and lifestyle event planning niche focuses on creating lively and engaging experiences, blending entertainment, ambiance, and personalisation | Source: Event Top

Charity and non-profit event planning niche

Charitable and non-profit events can be life-changing. What more if you’re the one organising them? This niche allows you to make a positive impact on the community while showcasing your event planning skills. 

  • Pros: Emotionally rewarding work that supports meaningful causes, opportunities to collaborate with passionate volunteers and donors, potential for high-profile events with celebrity involvement
  • Cons: Strict budget constraints and reliance on donations or sponsorships, challenges in securing venues and vendors at discounted rates, increased pressure to deliver successful events that meet fundraising goals

Virtual and hybrid event planning niche 

If you enjoy technology and blending physical and digital experiences, then the virtual and hybrid event planning niche might be right up your alley. With the rise of remote work and online events, this niche offers exciting opportunities to create immersive and engaging experiences for a global audience.

  • Pros: Increased accessibility for attendees from around the world, reduced overhead costs for venues and travel, opportunities to leverage innovative virtual event technologies
  • Cons: Challenges in creating a seamless and engaging virtual experience, technical difficulties and potential connectivity issues, limited opportunities for in-person networking and interactions

At the end of the day, choosing the right niche for your event planning business is crucial for long-term success and fulfilment. Consider your passions, strengths, and the needs of your local market. Remember, you can always expand or pivot your services as your business grows and evolves.

Decide on the service area for your event planning business

Determining where to establish or expand your event planning business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for event planning services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for event planning services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional event planners in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Event Planning Job Demand
Event planning services in Sydney29.4%
Event planning services in Melbourne20.9%
Event planning services in Perth13.1%
Event planning services in Brisbane11.1%
Event planning services in Adelaide6.2%

Australian cities with the highest event planning job demand

Sydney leads with 29.4% of the total event planning job demand in 2024. This is driven by the city’s status as a hub for corporate events, weddings, and large-scale entertainment productions. Its diverse population and vibrant lifestyle ensure a steady stream of demand for event planning services.

Melbourne follows with 20.9% of the demand, reflecting its active cultural calendar, including festivals, exhibitions, and corporate gatherings. Melbourne’s thriving arts scene and strong business sector contribute to its consistent need for professional event planners.

Perth captures 13.1% of the demand, ranking third. Despite its smaller population, Perth benefits from a growing focus on tourism and local business events, which keeps its event planning market robust.

Australian cities with lower event planning job demand

Brisbane holds 11.1% of the demand. It’s slightly behind Perth, but still significant due to its role as a key destination for conventions and private events. However, Adelaide, at 6.2%, represents a smaller portion of the market. This lower demand is linked to its smaller population and fewer large-scale events.

Businesses in lower-demand cities such as Gold Coast and Newcastle can capitalise on the market by offering specialised services, like eco-friendly event planning or unique venue partnerships. By targeting niche markets and building strong community relationships, you can still maintain growth and visibility even in smaller regions.

Understanding seasonal trends in the event planning business can help you manage demand fluctuations and optimise your operations.

Some months bring a significant influx of clients, while others slow down, making it essential to plan ahead. Strategically adapting to these cycles ensures consistent revenue and business stability throughout the year.

A joyful bride and groom walking down the aisle in an outdoor wedding, holding umbrellas as guests celebrate with flower petals in the rain.
Planning for seasonal trends in the event planning industry helps you adapt to weather conditions and client preferences, ensuring seamless celebrations year-round | Source: Diamante Weddings & Events

Identify popular seasons for event planning services

Event planning services show peak demand in March, January, and July, influenced by seasonal celebrations, holidays, and business events. March is the busiest month, reflecting the end of the summer event season, including corporate functions, community events, and outdoor festivals. The pleasant weather in March encourages gatherings, making it a prime month for event planning.

January sees significant demand due to New Year celebrations and summer weddings. The holiday season fosters a high volume of social and professional gatherings, increasing the need for event planners to manage logistics and creative planning.

July’s demand aligns with mid-year events, including winter weddings, corporate mid-year reviews, and personal celebrations. Despite cooler weather, indoor events and conferences contribute to maintaining strong demand during this time.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

Any good business owner knows that it’s not always smooth sailing, and the event planning industry is no exception. To navigate the ebbs and flows of seasonal demand, consider implementing the strategies below.

Diversify your event planning services

Diversifying your services means offering a range of event planning options to cater to different needs and preferences. For example, if you’re offering corporate events planning, you can give varied options to your clients such as conferences, seminars, and team-building activities. 

Similarly, if the role of wedding planner interests you, consider offering additional services like honeymoon planning, engagement parties, or even bridal showers. When you diversify your offerings, you cater to a wider range of clients and ensure a steady flow of business throughout the year.

Run promotional campaigns during off-season periods 

Running promotional campaigns during off-season periods is an excellent way to keep your event planning business afloat and attract new clients. 

One effective strategy is to offer discounted packages or bundle deals for events during the slower months. For instance, you could promote a “Fall Frenzy” package that includes a discounted rate for corporate team-building events or holiday parties booked between September and November.

Another approach is to leverage social media and email marketing campaigns to highlight the benefits of planning events during the off-season. You could share testimonials from past clients who enjoyed a more intimate and personalized experience due to the reduced demand. Additionally, you could showcase unique venue options or vendors that may be more readily available during the off-peak periods.

Build partnerships with complementary businesses 

Take your promotional campaigns to the next level by partnering with local businesses or organisations. For example, you could collaborate with a winery or brewery to offer a “Wine & Dine” package that combines event planning services with a private tasting experience. This adds value for your clients and exposes your business to a new audience.

For corporate clients, consider partnering with local hotels or resorts to offer exclusive packages that combine event planning services with discounted room rates or amenities. This could be an attractive option for companies hosting conferences or team-building retreats during the off-season.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring clients needing regular event planning

Lead generation sites like Oneflare can be a valuable resource for securing recurring clients who require regular event planning services. The platform acts as a hub and can connect you with individuals or businesses actively seeking event management assistance.

A Oneflare page listing top-rated party and event planners with reviews, qualifications, and options to request quotes.
Posting on lead generation sites like Oneflare helps event planners secure recurring clients by showcasing expertise, ratings, and reviews | Source: Oneflare

One of the primary benefits of using Oneflare is the potential to establish long-term client relationships. When you showcase your expertise and portfolio on their platform, you increase your visibility to clients who require ongoing event planning support. This could include corporations hosting regular conferences, non-profit organisations with annual fundraising galas, or individuals planning recurring family celebrations.

Establishing a presence on Oneflare can also contribute to building a reputable brand and a loyal client base. Consistently delivering high-quality services and maintaining positive client relationships can lead to word-of-mouth referrals and a strong online presence, further solidifying your position as a trusted and sought-after event planning professional. 

Register your event planning business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted event planners like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the event planning industry

Before you can establish your pricing structure and position your business, it’s crucial to first understand the market landscape and the competition. Take the time to research what other event planners in your area are charging for their services. Gather information on their pricing models, package offerings, and any additional fees or charges they may have.

Conduct a thorough analysis of your competitors’ strengths, weaknesses, and unique selling points. Identify areas where you can differentiate your services or offer added value to potential clients. This could involve specialising in a particular niche, such as eco-friendly or culturally diverse events, or incorporating innovative technologies or creative concepts into your event planning approach.

Understand the cost of common event planning services

As a beginner, you can’t just think of how much event planning costs in general. You need to know how much each event planning service would cost so you can build comprehensive and competitive pricing packages. 

Here’s a breakdown of the typical costs for various event planning services in Australia:

Types of Event Planning ServicesPrice Range
Wedding planning$1,400 to $4,500 per event
Corporate event planning$1,000 to $5,000 per event
Social event planning (e.g., birthdays)$500 to $3,000 per event
Fundraising and charity event planning$2,000 to $7,000 per event
Themed party planning$500 to $2,500 per event
Festival and concert planning$5,000 to $20,000+ per event

The costs vary significantly depending on the type and scale of the event. It’s essential to understand the specific services required for each event and factor in expenses such as venue hire, catering, entertainment, décor, and staffing. Additionally, consider the level of experience and expertise required, as more complex or high-profile events may command higher fees.

Decide how to charge for event planning services

Next, you need to decide how much to charge for event planning services you intend to offer. This might seem easy, but truth be told, there are several pricing models to consider. 

Flat fee for smaller events

For smaller events like intimate gatherings, birthday parties, or small corporate functions, a flat fee pricing model can be an effective approach. With a flat fee, you charge a fixed rate for the entire event planning service, regardless of the number of hours worked or specific tasks involved.

Percentage of the event budget for large-scale and corporate events

For large-scale and corporate events, a common pricing model is to charge a percentage of the total event budget. This approach aligns your fees with the scale and complexity of the event, ensuring fair compensation for the level of planning and coordination required.

Typically, event planners charge between 10-20% of the total event budget as their fee. This percentage can vary based on factors such as the event’s scope, duration, and specific requirements. For example, a more intricate event with extensive logistical challenges or high-profile guests may command a higher percentage, while a more simple corporate event could fall on the lower end of the range.

Hourly rate for day-of event planning and coordination

For smaller, one-day events or when clients only require assistance on the day of the event, an hourly rate pricing model can be suitable. This approach involves charging an hourly fee for the time spent on-site, managing and coordinating the event logistics.

The hourly rate for day-of event planning and coordination may vary, depending on factors such as the event planner’s experience, the event’s complexity, and the location. More experienced event planners or those handling high-profile events may command higher hourly rates.

Package pricing for specific event types

Package pricing is often preferred by most clients as it provides a clear, upfront cost for a predefined set of services. As an event planner, you can create packages tailored to specific event types, such as weddings, corporate events, or festivals. These packages can include a range of services, from venue selection and vendor coordination to decorations and on-site management. 

When you offer this option, simplify the pricing structure for clients while also ensuring that you’re fairly compensated for the work involved. Packages can be designed to cater to different budgets and event scales, allowing clients to choose the option that best suits their needs and budget.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Your unique selling points (UPS) are the things that make your business stand out from the rest. When deciding on your USPs, you need to identify your strengths and ensure that your clients understand how beneficial these are for their events. 

Specialised and customised event planning  

One of your USPs could be offering specialised and customised event planning services. While many event planners provide a standard set of services, you can differentiate yourself by tailoring your approach to each client’s specific needs and preferences. This could involve developing a deep understanding of the client’s vision, budget, and desired experience, and then crafting a customised event plan that brings their unique ideas to life.

Comprehensive end-to-end event planning service

Another unique selling point you could offer is a comprehensive end-to-end event planning service. Many clients find it overwhelming to coordinate all the various aspects of an event, from venue selection and vendor management to logistics and on-site execution. When you provide a full-service solution that handles every detail from start to finish, you alleviate the stress and burden on your clients, allowing them to focus on enjoying their event.

Sustainability-focused event planning

As the world becomes increasingly conscious of environmental issues, offering sustainability-focused event planning services can be a compelling USP. This approach involves incorporating eco-friendly practices throughout the event planning process. Examples of sustainable event planning initiatives could include using recycled materials for decorations, partnering with vendors who prioritise eco-friendly practices, and implementing recycling and composting programs at the event venue.

Strong vendor network and exclusive deals

Building a strong vendor network can be a powerful USP for your event planning business. When you establish solid relationships with trusted vendors, you gain access to exclusive deals and priority services that can set your offerings apart. For example, provide an event planning invoice example that showcases discounted rates on premium venues or catering services—clients will appreciate the added value you bring to the table.

Also, having a reliable vendor network ensures seamless coordination and high-quality outcomes for your events. Whether it’s securing last-minute rentals or negotiating competitive pricing, these connections can save both time and money for your clients. 

A Oneflare profile highlighting unique selling points of an event management professional, including experience, creativity, industry connections, stress reduction, and flat-rate pricing.
Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your event planning business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: LNR Events

Step 4: Explore funding options for your event planning business

Securing funding for your event planning business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business professional discussing funding options with a client, holding a document and pen at a desk with a laptop in the background
Exploring funding options is a key step in starting your event planning business, ensuring you have the resources to launch and grow successfully | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial event planning supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your event planning business, like vehicles and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup event planning businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic event planning business plan

Starting an event planning business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

An event planning expert reviewing a detailed business plan document with charts and graphs, sitting at a desk with a laptop in the background
Developing a strategic event planning business plan is essential for setting clear goals, outlining growth strategies, and achieving long-term success | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your event planning business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your event planning business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your event planning business description

Your event planning business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your event planning business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your event planning niche and types of services

The next step is defining the focus of your event planning business, whether it’s wedding planning, corporate event planning, social event planning, or a specific niche such as themed parties, charity events, or large-scale festivals.

Explain why you chose this niche and include a brief description of your target market. This could be couples planning their dream wedding, businesses seeking seamless corporate event coordination, families celebrating milestones like birthdays or anniversaries, or community groups hosting charity fundraisers or local festivals.

A lively party scene with guests dancing under a confetti shower in a beautifully lit event space.
Describing your event planning niche in your business plan is crucial for defining your target audience, refining your services, and setting your business apart from competitors | Source: SIFA Events

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and event planning business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your event planning services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of event planning services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting an event planning business, such as last-minute cancellations, vendor issues, unexpected weather conditions, client dissatisfaction, or liability concerns at event venues. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance and professional indemnity insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new event planning services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your event planning business

To start an event planning business, you may need to obtain a specific event planning license, registrations, and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government.

Step 7: Hire your event planners

Building a reliable team for your event planning business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire the right staff for your event planning business and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A celebrant leading a wedding ceremony in a scenic outdoor venue, with the bride, groom, and children standing at the front as guests watch attentively.
Building a reliable team for your event planning business is essential to ensure seamless execution, client satisfaction, and sustainable growth | Source: Mpm & Co

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as wedding planning, corporate event coordination, social event organisation, or themed party design). and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and hire event planners effectively, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, event planning skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For instance, you could ask how they handled challenging events in the past, adapted to last-minute changes or unexpected issues, managed uncooperative vendors or unforeseen circumstances, or met tight deadlines while ensuring a seamless and successful event for their clients.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your event planners will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Begin with training sessions to familiarise them with your event planning business’s standards, client interaction protocols, and specific workflows or tools they’ll need to follow for seamless event coordination.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your team members. 

Step 8: Invest in the right event planning tools and resources

Just like any other business, having the right tools and resources can make a significant difference in the efficiency and success of your event planning operations. Investing in the right technology and materials can streamline your processes, enhance your professionalism, and ultimately provide a better experience for your clients. 

Bear in mind, though, that each event planning niche requires specialised tools and resources. Here’s a breakdown of some key items and their estimated costs:

Event Planning Tools and ResourcesPrice RangeWhere to Buy
Planning softwareFree – $50 per monthAsana, Trello, Monday.com
Event management softwareFree – $100 per monthEventbrite, Whova
Decorations and supplies$100 – $1,000 per eventSpotlight, Kmart, Party Supplies Online
Tableware and furniture rentals$200 – $2,000 per eventHarry the Hirer, Event Artillery
Stationery and print materials$50 – $500Officeworks, Vistaprint, Canva
Professional camera for event photos$500 – $3,000CameraPro, DigiDirect, JB Hi-Fi
Portable sound system$300 – $2,000DJ City, Store DJ, Amazon Australia
Walkie-talkies (for team communication)$50 – $200Officeworks, Jaycar, Amazon Australia
Backdrop and lighting equipment$150 – $1,500Hypop, Spotlight, DigiDirect
Promotional materials (e.g., signage)$100 – $500Vistaprint, Officeworks, Kmart

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary depending on retailers, brands, and product quality. 

Step 9: Find clients for your event planning business

Once everything is set up and your event planning business is ready to go, the next step is to find clients. This, by far is going to be one of the most challenging parts of your journey. But it’s not impossible. The secret lies in the strategies you use to ensure that you reach your target audience and that you effectively communicate the value you offer. 

Expand your online presence

A strong online presence is essential for attracting clients to your event planning business. With Google dominating 91.47% of the global search engine market in 2024, reaching its massive user base of around 4.97 billion is a must. It means you have to build a website and optimise your online listings for search engines.

Build your event planning business website

A website is essential for establishing your event planning business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful event planning business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

Global Events Concepts

The Global Events Concept website features a clean, light blue design that’s easy on the eyes and highly functional. The homepage is well-organised, showcasing a clear range of services without unnecessary clutter. Everything is streamlined, making it simple to find what you need.

They increase credibility by prominently displaying partnerships and reinforcing trust and professionalism. The site effectively balances simplicity with thoroughness, delivering all the key information in an accessible format.

Homepage of Global Events Concepts showcasing event management services with a minimalist design and emphasis on collaboration and bespoke events.
A professional website like Global Events Concepts demonstrates the importance of a clean, user-friendly design to showcase your event management expertise and attract clients | Source: Global Event Concepts
Flavours Catering and Events

The Flavours Catering and Events website is designed with a pastel colour palette that’s easy on the eyes, creating a warm and welcoming experience. The layout highlights their varied menu options, complemented by appealing images that make the dishes look irresistible.

It’s also easy to navigate, with an accessible contact form that ensures getting in touch is quick. The well-thought-out design balances aesthetics with functionality, making it a perfect platform to explore their offerings.

Flavours Catering and Events website featuring fresh visuals, a quick contact form, and service categories for catering options.
Flavours Catering and Events highlights how an informative and visually appealing website can effectively showcase services and simplify customer inquiries | Source: Flavours Catering and Events
My Perfect Party

The My Perfect Party website bursts with fun and vibrant colours, instantly setting the tone for celebration. The design itself feels like a party, creating an upbeat and lively experience for visitors. Text is also kept to a minimum, with a focus on eye-catching designs and intuitive navigation. Quick links are conveniently placed on the homepage, making it easy to explore services and options. 

My Perfect Party website featuring a vibrant image of event styling, service offerings, and easy navigation for party planning services.
The My Perfect Party website underscores the value of using vibrant imagery and intuitive navigation to engage potential clients and promote your event planning services | Source: My Perfect Party

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for event planning businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for event planning services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your event planning expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

Oneflare profile for Bespoke Catering and Events Sydney, showcasing qualifications, reviews, business details, and client ratings to attract event planning clients.
Posting on lead-generation platforms like Oneflare is a powerful strategy for event planning businesses to reach potential clients and build trust through verified reviews and detailed business profiles | Source: Bespoke Catering and Events Sydney

Get started on Oneflare by registering your event planning business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

Google search results page showing event planners in Mandurah, WA, highlighting listings from platforms like Oneflare, Instagram, Facebook, and individual business websites.
Leveraging SEO and paid search strategies enhances visibility for event planning businesses, ensuring your services rank prominently on search engine results pages and attract potential clients | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your event planning work and portfolio visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting an event planning business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

EventZen – Facebook advertising

Facebook ads and posts by EventZen are vital in boosting visibility for an event planning business. They repost customer reviews, letting happy clients do the talking which builds trust and credibility with their audience.

Their use of fun hashtags adds a playful and engaging touch, making their posts easily discoverable and shareable. Bold text over eye-catching images ensures announcements and updates grab attention instantly, even when scrolling quickly.

EventZen's Facebook business page showcasing event photos, posts, and contact information for a wedding planning service in Neutral Bay, NSW.
Maximise your event planning business’s outreach by harnessing the power of Facebook advertising | Source: Buchanan, Natalie
Events Mate – Instagram advertising

EventsMate’s Instagram page is a vibrant and engaging showcase of their event planning expertise. The colourful aesthetic creates a fun yet relaxing vibe, drawing viewers in and making their feed a pleasure to scroll through.

They highlight quality reviews from clients by designing images with text. They also build credibility and trust while showing the impact of their services. Their posts feature stunning images from a variety of events, giving followers a glimpse into the diverse experiences they create

Instagram profile of Events Mate, showcasing event highlights, testimonials, and branded visuals for a full-service event planning and management company in Australia.
Boost your event planning business’s visibility and credibility with a curated Instagram presence | Source: Events Mate
Pop Events – TikTok advertising

Pop Events’ TikTok presence is all about capturing attention and delivering entertainment. Their fun choice of music perfectly complements the energetic vibe of their videos, making them highly engaging for viewers.

They feature a variety of content like weddings and kiddie birthday parties, from behind-the-scenes clips of event setups to dynamic showcases of the final results. Highlighting the process of decorating event spaces also adds a personal touch, giving followers an insider’s look at their creativity and effort.

TikTok profile of Pop Events, showcasing videos of creative event designs, including table settings, balloon decorations, and themed event setups.
Leverage TikTok to promote your event planning business by showcasing unique setups, behind-the-scenes moments, and engaging themes | Source: Pop Events

Build your event planning’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

Screenshot of client reviews for Beautiful Weddings by Lisa on Oneflare, highlighting satisfied customers and positive feedback.
Encourage reviews and referrals to strengthen your event planning business’s reputation | Source: Beautiful Weddings By Lisa

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks. 

Step 10: Get paid for your event planning services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your event planning services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a hand pressing the 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen to complete an online payment.
Simplify payments for your event planning services by offering secure and convenient online payment options for your clients | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create an event planning business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable blank event planning invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free event planning invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s event planning invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's event planning invoice templates, showing options to share, download, or print invoices for clients.
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing event planning invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s event planning invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for various businesses, such as event planning businesses. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for event planning services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s event planning invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help event planning businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s event planning invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organized layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for event planning businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking event planning services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Launch your event planning business and start creating memories today!

Starting an event planning business can be a fulfilling venture for those who love organising memorable experiences. The key to a successful venture is understanding your strengths and your target market. Follow the steps outlined above and you’ll be well-equipped to build a thriving event planning business.

Don’t let your efforts go to waste. Once your event planning business is up and running, partner with a trustworthy platform where you can showcase your event planning services and connect with customers. 

Oneflare offers an all-in-one solution to help you reach your target audience, manage inquiries, and streamline your bookings. Its easy-to-use features can help you build credibility, expand your network, and focus on what you do best—creating unforgettable events. Register your event planning business today and take your business to the next level.


FAQs on how to start an event planning business

How do you build a strong relationship with vendors and suppliers?

To build trust and reliability, always communicate clearly and promptly with vendors and suppliers. Regularly check-in, honour agreements, and treat them as partners in your success. 

How to manage unexpected issues during an event?

It’s normal to experience challenges during events, especially when you’re following a strict event or wedding checklist. The key is to remain calm, think on your feet, and have contingency plans in place. Keep a solid team by your side, stay in constant communication with vendors, and always have backup options to manage unforeseen circumstances smoothly.

How much does it cost to start an event planning business?

The cost of starting an event planning business can vary depending on factors such as your location, the scale of your services, and whether you’re working from home or renting office space. On average, initial costs can range from $15,000 to $25,000 for branding, marketing, software tools, and event management resources.

Categories
Business guides

How to start a wedding business

Weddings are personal, emotional, and full of meaning, and being the one to help bring those celebrations to life is something that many aspiring entrepreneurs find fulfilling. If you’re looking to start your own wedding planning business in Australia, there’s a real opportunity to carve out a niche while building a solid portfolio.

Building your business from the ground up is no easy feat, but with the right approach, you can grow it into a trusted part of your local wedding industry. This guide will help you navigate the steps on how to start a wedding business, from attracting clients and establishing steady income to using platforms like Oneflare to connect with couples.

Step 1: Identify the market of your wedding business

Identifying your market helps target the right clients by understanding local demand and competition. This ensures you can cater to both intimate ceremonies and larger weddings, positioning your business competitively within the local market.

Explore different types of wedding services

Exploring various types of wedding services will help you expand your offerings and meet diverse client needs. By diversifying your services, you can cater to different types of weddings, from small intimate gatherings to large celebrations, ensuring you appeal to a wider range of clients.

Wedding planning services

A wedding planning service involves coordinating every aspect of a couple’s big day, guiding them from the initial concept to the final execution. This includes managing budgets, selecting vendors, creating timelines, organising logistics, and overseeing every detail to ensure the day runs smoothly. 

A wedding party posing together indoors, featuring the bride in a white gown, groom in a tuxedo, bridesmaids in elegant white dresses, and groomsmen in black suits.
Professional wedding planning ensures a seamless and beautifully coordinated celebration for the bride, groom, and their loved ones | Source: EventZen

Wedding car hire

A wedding car hire service provides couples with stylish and reliable transportation for their big day and ensures that the couples along with their guests arrive at the venue comfortably and on time. This service can include classic cars, luxury vehicles, or even unique options like vintage cars or limousines.

Wedding photography

A key element in providing a complete wedding experience is including wedding photography in your services. This service includes capturing the special moments of the couple’s big day and preserving their memories for a lifetime. A wedding photography service can also include pre-wedding shoots and after-wedding party coverage, immortalising every part of the celebration.

A bridal party posing outdoors on a rural road during sunset, featuring the bride in a lace gown, bridesmaids in satin dresses, and groomsmen in white shirts with dark trousers.
Capturing the golden hour glow, this wedding photo showcases the natural beauty of outdoor celebrations and timeless group portraits | Source: Little Glimpses

Wedding videography

Wedding videos are an increasingly popular service, allowing couples to relive their day through professionally edited footage. Wedding videography commonly includes filming the ceremony, speeches, and celebrations, offering couples a cinematic keepsake.

Wedding florist services

Offering wedding florist services adds a personal touch and helps create a memorable atmosphere, making it a valuable addition to your wedding business. Wedding florists work with the couple closely and are in charge of creating beautiful floral arrangements that match their theme and style for various aspects of the wedding, including bouquets, centrepieces, and venue décor.

Wedding hair styling

A wedding hair styling service involves creating stunning hairstyles for the bride and bridal party, tailored to their preferences and the overall wedding theme. Offering wedding hair styling as part of your services adds an extra layer of convenience for clients, providing them with a complete package that helps them feel confident and beautiful throughout their celebration.

Wedding makeup artists

Wedding makeup is a must-have service for any wedding business. Wedding makeup artists ensure the bride and bridal party look flawless, with long-lasting, camera-ready makeup. Including this service meets a key client need and enhances your business by offering a complete, convenient experience that clients will value.

Wedding cake design

Wedding cake design involves creating custom cakes that reflect the couple’s style and theme. From elegant tiered designs to unique, personalised touches, wedding cake designers work closely with clients to craft a centrepiece that’s both beautiful and delicious.

Wedding entertainment

Ensure a fun and unforgettable wedding day for the couple and their guests by offering wedding entertainment as part of your business. This service includes organising a performance from DJs, live bands, or musicians who will keep guests engaged and create a lively atmosphere throughout the celebration.

Wedding decor and styling

Wedding decor and styling create a beautiful atmosphere that reflects the couple’s style, including elements like table settings, floral arrangements, and venue decorations. Offering this service ensures every detail is thoughtfully planned, enhancing the overall wedding experience.

Choose your wedding business niche

Choosing a niche for your wedding business is crucial for standing out and attracting the right clients. It allows you to tailor your services and effectively meet the unique needs of your target market.

Luxury wedding planning and styling niche

The luxury wedding planning and styling niche focuses on creating high-end, bespoke experiences for couples seeking an extravagant celebration that reflects their unique tastes and preferences. This involves working with exclusive and unique venues and premium vendors, and offering custom designs tailored to the couple’s vision. Every detail is meticulously planned, from intricate décor to lavish floral arrangements, to ensure a flawless event. 

  • Pros: Higher profits due to premium pricing
  • Cons: Increased pressure to deliver flawless, high-stakes events

Intimate wedding and elopement niche 

The intimate wedding and elopement niche focuses on smaller, more personal celebrations, often with just close family or even just the couple themselves. This niche allows for a more relaxed, flexible approach to planning, with couples seeking a meaningful, stress-free experience

  • Pros: Ability to offer highly personalised, tailored services
  • Cons: Lower pricing due to the smaller scale of the events
A bride and groom exchanging vows in an intimate indoor ceremony, surrounded by bridesmaids, groomsmen, and elegant floral decor under a draped ceiling.
The intimate wedding niche helps wedding couples achieve a heartfelt and personalised experience, focusing on close connections and beautiful settings | Source: Marrying Me

Eco-friendly wedding niche

The eco-friendly wedding niche focuses on sustainable, environmentally-conscious celebrations, using organic materials, eco-friendly vendors, and green practices like zero-waste planning and biodegradable décor.

  • Pros: Opportunity to align with a socially responsible and impactful brand
  • Cons: Increases planning complexity due to needing more time to source fitting vendors

Cultural and destination wedding niche

The cultural and destination wedding niche is growing in popularity as more couples seek unique, personalised experiences that blend cultural traditions or take place in exotic, dream locations. These weddings allow couples to incorporate meaningful customs while celebrating in stunning destinations. However, it often requires detailed travel coordination, local vendor sourcing, and an understanding of the logistics involved in hosting events in remote or international locations. 

This wedding business idea also offers the potential for high-end, bespoke services, attracting couples who desire a once-in-a-lifetime experience tailored to their cultural heritage or dream destination.

  • Pros: Opportunities for higher fees due to the complexity of planning and travel arrangements
  • Cons: Increased planning challenges and higher costs due to travel, venue sourcing, and cultural considerations.

Bridal beauty service niche

The bridal beauty service niche focuses on offering hair, makeup, and skincare treatments tailored to brides and their bridal parties. This service ensures that everyone looks and feels their best on the big day, with personalised styling and long-lasting results.

  • Pros: Building strong relationships with beauty professionals can lead to long-term collaborations and business growth.
  • Cons: High competition from other beauty providers, making it important to differentiate your services.

Decide on the service area for your wedding business

Determining where to establish or expand your wedding business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for wedding services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for wedding services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional wedding coordinators in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Wedding-Related Job Demand
Wedding services in Melbourne22.9%
Wedding services in Sydney21.2%
Wedding services in Brisbane13.5%
Wedding services in Perth6.4%
Wedding services in Adelaide5.3%

Australian cities with the highest wedding job demand

Melbourne leads the wedding business demand, capturing 22.9% of the total demand across Australia. This is driven by its large and diverse population, a wide range of wedding venues, and a thriving cultural scene that includes multicultural celebrations, which often require specialised services.

Sydney follows closely with 21.2% of the demand. Its high demand is attributed to its status as an iconic city with scenic wedding locations such as harbourside venues and beaches, making it a popular choice for both local and destination weddings.

Brisbane ranks third, representing 13.5% of the total demand. The subtropical climate and outdoor-friendly venues, coupled with a growing population, make Brisbane a prime spot for weddings, particularly during the cooler months.

Australian cities with lower wedding job demand

Cities like Perth and Adelaide have lower shares, at 6.4% and 5.3% respectively. While these cities see less demand compared to the major metropolitan areas, they still present opportunities for wedding service providers. Their smaller but steady markets allow businesses to specialise in unique offerings, such as eco-friendly weddings or tailored cultural celebrations, which can distinguish them from competitors in larger markets.

Additionally, the less saturated market environment in these cities makes it easier to establish strong, long-term relationships with clients, potentially leading to repeat business and referrals.

Understanding seasonal trends in the wedding business is essential for managing demand fluctuations and optimising your operations. 

Some months see a significant influx of clients, while others slow down, making it vital to plan ahead. Strategically adapting to these cycles ensures consistent revenue and business stability throughout the year, regardless of seasonal variations in demand.

An outdoor wedding ceremony under a large tree, with the bride and groom exchanging vows surrounded by guests seated on white chairs.
Planning for seasonal trends in the wedding industry helps manage demand fluctuations and streamline operations for success | Source: Beautiful Weddings By Lisa

Identify popular seasons for wedding services

The top three peak months for wedding services in 2024 are January, March, and April, according to Oneflare’s 2024 data on the total job postings for each type of service.

January shows the highest demand, which could be attributed to the post-holiday wedding season where couples often plan their ceremonies after New Year festivities. The availability of venues and the summer season in Australia make it a popular choice.

March and April also see significant demand, driven by the start of the autumn season, which offers mild and pleasant weather—ideal for outdoor and scenic weddings.

Peak season for wedding planning

Wedding planners experience the highest demand in April, January, and May. April’s popularity stems from the start of the autumn season, which is a preferred wedding time in Australia due to its comfortable weather and scenic appeal. January’s demand aligns with summer weddings, while May signifies the end of the season, as couples finalize their events before winter.

Peak season for wedding photography

Wedding photography peaks in January, March, and April. The high demand correlates with the increased number of weddings during these months, as couples aim to capture their ceremonies in the favourable summer and early autumn light.

Peak season for wedding makeup artists

Demand for wedding makeup artists is highest in January, March, and February. These months align with the peak wedding season, as brides and bridal parties seek professional makeup services for their big day.

Peak season for wedding hair stylists

Wedding hair stylists are most in demand in January, March, and May. January’s demand stems from the summer wedding trend, while March and May weddings often prioritise stylists for their outdoor-friendly celebrations and pre-winter events.

Peak season for wedding car hire

Wedding car hire sees its peak demand in January, February, and March. January’s high demand is driven by the summer wedding boom, where luxury cars are often a part of grand celebrations.

February and March maintain strong demand as couples plan picturesque arrivals and exits for their ceremonies in the warm and pleasant weather.

Peak season for wedding florists

Wedding florists are the busiest in March, April, and February. These months coincide with the blooming season for many flowers, allowing couples to choose fresh and diverse arrangements. Additionally, the transition from summer to autumn enhances the use of floral decorations, driving up the demand for professional florists.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

To adapt to seasonal fluctuations, plan strategies that ensure steady business year-round. Offering seasonal promotions or focusing on off-season events, like winter or autumn weddings, can help attract clients during slower months. Adjusting your services and marketing ensures your business stays profitable, regardless of the season.

Offer off-season discounts and packages

Offering off-season discounts and packages is an effective way to attract clients during quieter months. By offering special rates during the slower months, you can appeal to couples looking to save money while still receiving top-quality services. 

This strategy helps you maintain a steady flow of business throughout the year, maximising revenue during slower periods and ensuring your business remains active year-round.

Diversify your wedding services

Diversifying your wedding services is a smart way to attract a broader range of clients. By offering additional services such as event coordination, floral design, or photography, you can cater to different needs and increase your revenue streams. 

Build vendor relationships and plan ahead

Building strong vendor relationships and planning ahead is crucial for success in the wedding business. By connecting with trusted vendors early, you ensure availability, competitive pricing, and a smooth experience for your clients. 

Post on lead generation sites to attract more wedding clients

Posting on wedding lead generation sites is an effective way to attract more wedding clients. By listing your services on platforms like Oneflare, you increase visibility and connect with couples actively searching for wedding professionals. This helps expand your reach and generate a consistent flow of inquiries, boosting your chances of securing more bookings.

A detailed business profile of a marriage celebrant on Oneflare, including qualifications, reviews, contact information, and operating hours.
Posting on lead generation sites like Oneflare helps wedding businesses connect with potential clients and grow their businesses effectively | Source: Oneflare

Register your wedding business and services on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted wedding coordinators like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the wedding industry

Researching market rates and analysing competitors in the wedding industry is crucial when starting a wedding business. This helps you position your business effectively, attract clients, and ensure profitability in a crowded market.

Understand the cost of common wedding services

Understanding how wedding planners and event planning businesses charge for their services, along with the rates for other key vendors like photographers, florists, and caterers, helps you set competitive prices. It will allow you to create accurate budgets for clients and ensure you’re pricing your services fairly while maintaining profitability.

Here’s a breakdown of the typical costs for various wedding services in Australia:

Type of Wedding ServiceAverage Cost Range
Wedding planning cost$1,400 – $4,500
Wedding car hire cost$500 – $1,000
Wedding DJ cost$350 – $1,200
Wedding videography cost$2,000 – $4,000
Wedding flowers cost$500 – $3,500
Wedding photography cost$700 – $4,000

Knowing the typical budget ranges for various wedding elements gives you valuable insight into the financial expectations of your clients, allowing you to offer tailored packages or services that fit their needs. This can help you position your business as both cost-effective and high-quality, leading to stronger client relationships and a steady flow of bookings.

Decide how to charge for wedding services

Deciding how to charge for wedding services is one of the most vital aspects of your business structure. You can choose a flat fee, hourly rate, or a percentage of the wedding budget, depending on the service.

Consider your services’ complexity and market rates to find the pricing model that works best for both you and your clients.

Flat fee for small and day-of-coordination wedding services

A flat fee for small and day-of-coordination wedding services is an effective pricing model for these more straightforward events. This approach offers clients a clear, upfront cost without the need for complicated calculations.

An hourly rate is ideal for à la carte wedding services, or those that don’t require full planning but still demand attention to detail, like vendor sourcing or timeline creation. Charging by the hour allows flexibility, ensuring clients only pay for the time spent on specific tasks. 

Percentage of total budget for large-scale and luxury weddings

Charging a percentage of the total budget is a common pricing model for large-scale and luxury weddings, where the complexity and scale of the event demand more time and resources. Typically ranging from 10% to 20%, this approach aligns your fees with the overall cost of the wedding, ensuring you’re compensated fairly for managing intricate details, high-end vendors, and logistics.

Tiered packages for wedding events with different budgets and service needs

Tiered packages are an effective way to cater to wedding events with varying budgets and service needs. By offering multiple package options—such as basic, standard, and premium—you allow clients to choose the level of service that best fits their budget and requirements. 

This approach helps you appeal to a broader range of clients, making your services accessible to those with different financial expectations.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Evaluating your unique selling points (USPs) helps distinguish your wedding business from competitors. Whether it’s personalised service, niche expertise, or offering an ultimate wedding planning guide, highlighting your USPs attracts clients who value these unique qualities. 

Personalised, stress-free wedding planning services 

This approach is all about customising every detail to reflect the couple’s vision while managing all aspects of the wedding. From coordinating vendors to creating timelines, and even handling wedding readings—an area where many couples feel stress— a personalised wedding planning service ensures everything runs smoothly. This lets clients relax and fully enjoy their day, free from the worry of managing logistics and decisions, allowing them to focus on what matters most.

All-inclusive wedding expertise

All-inclusive wedding expertise means offering a wide range of services that cover every aspect of the planning process, from vendor coordination to managing timelines and event design. Providing everything in one package saves clients time, reduces stress, and ensures a seamless experience. 

Adding an ultimate wedding checklist to your services helps clients stay organised, while your professional care ensures no detail is overlooked. This approach offers peace of mind, knowing that all their needs are met with expert attention and care.

Eco-friendly and sustainable weddings 

Green wedding solutions focus on minimising environmental impact by using locally sourced flowers, sustainable materials, and reducing waste. This USP is perfect forcouples who are trying to make environmentally conscious choices, such as using digital invitations, reusable décor, and eco-friendly catering options.

Expertise in intimate and unique weddings

Expertise in smaller, more intimate weddings is also a good USP to consider. For this service, you must ensure that every detail is well-coordinated. 

One good example is arranging the order of wedding speeches. By managing the timeline and guiding the couple and speakers, the planner ensures that each speech happens at the right moment, creating a smooth flow. This attention to detail helps make such intimate and personal celebrations run effortlessly, allowing the couple and their close guests to enjoy every special moment without worrying about the logistics.

A list of unique selling points for a wedding celebrant, highlighting experience, inclusivity, flexibility, and range of services offered on Oneflare.
Promoting your USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your wedding business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer.

Step 4: Explore funding options for your wedding business

Securing funding for your wedding business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business professional discussing funding options with a client, holding a document and pen at a desk with a laptop in the background
Exploring funding options is a key step in starting your wedding business, ensuring you have the resources to launch and grow successfully | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial wedding business supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your wedding business, like vehicles and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup wedding businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic wedding business plan

Starting a wedding business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

A wedding expert reviewing a detailed business plan document with charts and graphs, sitting at a desk with a laptop in the background
Developing a strategic wedding business plan is essential for setting clear goals, outlining growth strategies, and achieving long-term success | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your wedding business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your wedding business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your wedding business description

Your wedding business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your wedding business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your wedding business niche and types of services

The next step is to define the focus of your wedding business, whether it’s full-service wedding planning, day-of coordination, bridal beauty services, or a specific niche such as destination weddings, intimate elopements, or luxury celebrations.

Clarify why you chose this niche and include a brief description of your target market. For instance, your target audience could be couples planning their dream wedding, brides seeking professional hair and makeup services, or individuals looking for unique and personalised wedding experiences such as eco-friendly or cultural celebrations.

A bride with curled auburn hair styled with peach floral accessories, wearing a matching floral necklace and elegant gown
Your business plan should clearly define your wedding business niche and specialised services, like bridal makeup or floral styling | Source: Makiaz Hair And Makeup

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and wedding business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your wedding services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of wedding services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a wedding business, such as last-minute cancellations, unreliable vendors, unexpected weather impacting outdoor ceremonies, and liability concerns at wedding venues. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance and professional indemnity insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new wedding services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your wedding business

To start a wedding business, you may need to obtain registrations, wedding business licenses and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government. 

Step 7: Hire your wedding service staff

Building a reliable team for your wedding business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire the wedding staff for your business and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A joyful bride and groom signing their wedding certificate outdoors, surrounded by family.
Hiring skilled and professional wedding service staff, such as wedding photographers and wedding coordinators, is crucial to ensuring a seamless and memorable event for your clients | Source: Tears Of Joy Weddings And Celebrations

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as wedding planning, coordinating corporate events, organising social gatherings, or designing themed celebrations) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and hire event staff for your wedding business effectively, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, wedding coordination skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask how they managed difficult weddings in the past, dealt with last-minute changes or unexpected challenges, handled uncooperative vendors or logistical issues, or met tight deadlines while delivering a flawless and memorable experience for their clients.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your wedding staff will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Start with training sessions to introduce them to your wedding business’s standards, client communication protocols, and the specific workflows or tools they’ll use to ensure flawless wedding coordination.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive workplace culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your team members. 

Step 8: Invest in the right wedding tools and resources

Investing in quality tools, equipment, and materials is essential to running a successful wedding business. From planning software to premium decor and equipment, these resources ensure seamless operations and a flawless experience for clients. 

Bear in mind, though, that each wedding business niche requires specialised tools and resources. Here’s a breakdown of some key items and their estimated costs:

Wedding Business Tools and ResourcesPrice RangeWhere to Buy
Wedding planning softwareFree – $50/monthEasy Weddings planning tools, WedSites
Decorations and supplies$100 – $1,000/eventWholesale Wedding Superstore, Gems Wedding Supplies
Tableware and furniture rentals$200 – $2,000/eventHarry the Hirer, Event Artillery
Stationery and print materials$50 – $500Vistaprint, Officeworks
Professional camera for wedding photos$500 – $3,000CameraPro, DigiDirect
Portable sound system$300 – $2,000DJ City, Store DJ
Walkie-talkies (for team communication)$50 – $200Officeworks, Jaycar
Backdrop and lighting equipment$150 – $1,500Hypop, Spotlight
Promotional materials (e.g., signage)$100 – $500Vistaprint, Officeworks

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary depending on retailers, brands, and product quality.

Step 9: Find clients for your wedding business

If you’re wondering how to get wedding clients, focus on building a strong online presence, networking with local vendors, and displaying your work on social media. Collecting client reviews, running promotions, and encouraging referrals can also help attract new business and strengthen your reputation in the wedding industry.

Expand your online presence

Expanding your online presence is essential for attracting more clients to your wedding business. A strong online presence helps build trust, connect with a broader audience, and generate more leads.

Build your wedding business website

A website is essential for establishing your wedding business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful wedding business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

Florisian Floral Design

The Florisian Floral Design website keeps it simple, focusing solely on showcasing stunning floral arrangements. The clean design highlights their portfolio of beautiful creations, letting the flowers speak for themselves. With minimal distractions, the site offers a straightforward view of their work, allowing clients to easily browse and appreciate the vendor’s skill in crafting the perfect floral designs for weddings.

A wedding website showcasing categories like function flowers, ceremony flowers, and bridal party arrangements, with a gallery of exquisite floral creations
Creating a professional website like Florisian Floral Design highlights your wedding services and floral creations | Source: Florisian Floral Design
Sharon Munro Weddings

The website of Sharon Munro Weddings delivers a direct, high-end message, luring potential clients with compelling copy that speaks to their desire for an extraordinary wedding experience. 

Beautiful, captivating wedding photographs are strategically displayed throughout, giving prospective clients a glimpse into how their own big day could look. With its sleek, polished design and attention-grabbing visuals, the site positions the vendor as the go-to choice for couples seeking a luxurious, unforgettable celebration.

A wedding website homepage featuring a smiling bridal party outdoors with the tagline 'Your best day ever starts here' and options to see services or book a free call.
A professional website like Sharon Munro Weddings showcases your brand’s professionalism, helping couples easily explore your services and connect with you | Source: Sharon Munro
Your Unique Occasion

Your Unique Occasion’s website effectively showcases the variety of celebrations the vendor caters to, highlighting their expertise in creating unforgettable experiences for different types of events. It clearly outlines the process, giving potential clients a transparent view of what to expect. 

By explaining the steps involved and what the vendor can do for them, the site helps clients feel confident and excited about booking, offering a clear path from initial inquiry to the final celebration.

A wedding and ceremony website homepage featuring a serene beach backdrop with the tagline 'Your unique occasion that will be remembered forever.'
Your Unique Occasion exemplifies how personalisation and a strong visual identity on your website can resonate with clients seeking memorable ceremonies | Source: Your Unique Occasion

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for wedding businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for wedding services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your wedding coordination expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

A Oneflare business profile showcasing a wedding business's qualifications, reviews, contact details, and operating hours.
Posting on lead-generation platforms like Oneflare is one of the most effective ways for wedding businesses to connect with clients and grow their services | Source: Annette Perryman

Get started on Oneflare by registering your wedding business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

Google search results for 'wedding planner Craigieburn' showing listings from Oneflare and more.
Optimising your wedding business for SEO ensures higher visibility in search results, helping you attract local clients searching for your services | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your wedding-related work and portfolio visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a wedding business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

Apostolakis, Eva – Facebook advertising

Eva Hair and Makeup Facebook account beautifully showcases their creative expertise through stunning photos and videos of elegant bridal hairstyles. With each post, the stylist highlights intricate updos, flowing curls, and flawless finishes, offering a glimpse into their artistry. 

The account provides inspiration for brides-to-be, emphasising attention to detail and personalised styling that enhances the bride’s natural beauty on her special day.

The Facebook business page for Eva Hair and Makeup, showcasing a professional profile, contact details, and a video post featuring makeup services.
Using Facebook advertising like Eva Hair and Makeup can help your wedding business reach targeted audiences and showcase your expertise through engaging content | Source: Apostolakis, Eva
Love is Light Wedding Photography – Instagram advertising

This Love is Light Wedding Photography Instagram account, with nearly 3,000 followers, features a stunning collection of candid, heartfelt photos capturing the raw emotion and beauty of weddings. Each post showcases natural moments and genuine connections, highlighting the photographer’s ability to tell a compelling story through images. This is effective in attracting engaged couples seeking a photographer with a talent for storytelling.

The Instagram profile for Love is Light Wedding Photography, featuring a gallery of natural and candid wedding photos and a bio describing their Sydney-based services.
Instagram advertising, like Love is Light Wedding Photography, showcases your work and connects with couples seeking wedding services for their special day | Source: Love is Light Wedding Photography
Hannah Senam Makeup Artist – Tiktok advertising

The Tiktok account of Hannah Senam Makeup Artist with over 44K followers, specialises in bridal glam, showcasing stunning transformations. Each video highlights the step-by-step process, revealing the artistry behind flawless, personalised wedding looks. The account also leverages the platform’s viral potential to reach a wider audience and attract more clients.

The TikTok profile of Hannah Senam Makeup Artist featuring videos of bridal makeup transformations and wedding day preparations with high engagement views.
Leveraging TikTok advertising allows wedding businesses to showcase skills and attract clients through viral, engaging content | Source: Hannah Senam Makeup Artist

Build your wedding business’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new wedding clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

Client reviews for Alan Rogers Photography on a lead-generation platform, highlighting positive feedback about professionalism and excellent service.
Building your wedding business’s reputation through reviews and referrals enhances trust and credibility, helping you attract more clients | Source: Alan Rogers Photography

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win wedding-related jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks.

Step 10: Get paid for your wedding services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your wedding services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a hand pressing the 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen to complete an online payment.
Simplify payments for your wedding services by offering secure and convenient online payment options for your clients | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a wedding business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable wedding invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free wedding invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s wedding invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's wedding invoice templates, showing options to share, download, or print invoices for clients.
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing wedding invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s wedding invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for various businesses, like wedding businesses. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for wedding services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s wedding invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help wedding businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s wedding invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organized layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for wedding businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking wedding services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Start growing your wedding business today – register on Oneflare

Starting your wedding business is like designing the perfect wedding: you need to focus on every detail. From refining your services to building an online presence, it all contributes to a successful wedding business.

Ready to create your dream business? Register your services on Oneflare and connect with couples seeking skilled wedding professionals. Oneflare is the ideal platform to showcase your expertise and grow your client base.

Start today, and watch your wedding business flourish like the perfect celebration!


FAQs on how to start a wedding business

How do you build a strong relationship with wedding vendors and suppliers?

Building a strong relationship with wedding vendors and suppliers starts with clear communication and mutual respect. Always be professional, punctual, and transparent about expectations. Networking at events, showing appreciation for their work, and referring clients to trusted vendors can also help strengthen these connections, leading to long-term partnerships.

How to stay on top of wedding trends?

Stay on top of wedding trends by following industry blogs, social media, and magazines. Attend bridal shows and networking events, and stay connected with other vendors. Joining industry groups and experimenting with new ideas in your work will help you stay relevant and inspire your clients with fresh trends.

How much does it cost to start a wedding business?

The cost to start a wedding business can range from $2,000 to $10,000, depending on your services. For a small-scale operation, you may only need expenses for a website ($500–$2,000), marketing ($500–$1,500), and basic equipment or supplies ($500–$2,000). If you’re offering higher-end services or need specialised equipment, the cost may increase. Careful planning can help you manage these costs while building a solid foundation for your business.

Categories
Business guides

How to start a plumbing business

Plumbing is more than a trade. It’s an opportunity to build a business that puts you in control of your future. If you’ve ever wondered how to start a plumbing business, the journey begins with the right plan and approach. Starting small with residential repairs and minor installations allows aspiring entrepreneurs to establish a strong portfolio and steady income without overwhelming resources.

This guide will walk you through every step, from creating a solid business plan and securing necessary certifications to attracting clients. As your skills and reputation grow, we’ll also explore how to expand into larger projects. By the end, you’ll have a clear roadmap on how to start a plumbing company.

Step 1: Identify the market of your plumbing business

Start by exploring the types of plumbing services in demand locally. Focus on what residential clients need most, like blocked drains or emergency plumbing, to align your services with their expectations. This groundwork will also guide you in securing the right plumbing business license for your offerings.

Explore different types of plumbing services

Knowing the types of plumbing services you’ll offer is key to carving out your niche. Focus on what local homeowners and small businesses frequently need. This will help you position your business effectively and plan for growth.

Pipe installation and repair

Pipe installation and plumbing repair services are essential for residential and business clients. Whether it’s installing new pipes during construction or fixing leaks and corrosion, these services are always in demand. Older properties often need system upgrades, creating opportunities to specialise in modern solutions like PEX (cross-linked polyethylene) or copper piping.

A wall-mounted pipe installation featuring copper pipes with multiple valves and a connected PVC pipe supported by a metal bracket
Reliable pipe installation and repairs are crucial for maintaining efficient plumbing systems in homes and businesses | Source: Plumbing Excellence

Drain cleaning

Drain cleaning tackles stubborn blockages caused by grease, hair, or soap scum that DIY plumbing hacks often fail to resolve. Using professional tools like hydro-jetting or drain snakes ensures thorough cleaning without damaging pipes. Advanced options like camera inspections can attract clients with recurring issues, including homeowners and commercial kitchens dealing with grease buildup.

Hot water installation and repairs

Hot water installation and repairs are critical for homeowners and businesses with high water usage. From installing energy-efficient systems like tankless or solar heaters to fixing leaks and inconsistent temperatures, these services address essential needs. 

Blocked drains

Blocked drains are a common issue caused by grease buildup or flushing things that can’t go down the drain. Whether it’s unblocking a drain sink or clearing main sewer lines, these services are essential for homes and businesses like restaurants and laundromats. Emergency services for stubborn clogs, especially during peak times, can set your plumbing business apart.

A partially excavated area showing PVC pipes connected to an outdoor drainage system alongside soil, tools, and debris, illustrating plumbing work to address a blocked drain
Clogged drains are often the result of grease or improper waste disposal. Expert plumbers can help clear and restore your drainage system | Source: Wilco Contracting

Gas fitting and gas leak detection

Gas fitting involves installing gas lines for appliances like stoves, heaters, and fireplaces, ensuring they meet safety standards. Detecting and repairing gas leaks requires precision and advanced tools to protect clients from serious risks. With the growing demand for energy-efficient gas appliances, this service appeals to homeowners upgrading systems and businesses needing reliable installations.

Emergency plumbing

Emergency plumbing handles urgent issues like burst pipes, major leaks, or sewer backups that can’t wait. Offering 24/7 availability helps clients avoid extensive damage and ensures your business is ready when they need it most. 

Pipe relining

Pipe relining is a cost-effective way to fix damaged sewer or underground pipes without digging. Instead of relining or replacing pipes through excavation, epoxy resin is used to create a strong, durable lining inside the existing structure. This eco-friendly solution is ideal for homeowners wanting minimal disruption and for municipalities tackling large-scale pipe repairs.

Roof and gutter plumbing

Roof and gutter plumbing focuses on installing and maintaining drainage systems to prevent water damage. This is especially important during seasonal maintenance or after storms when leaks or blockages can cause major issues. 

Sewage plumbing

Sewage plumbing involves installing and repairing sewer lines to prevent backups, blockages, and unpleasant odours. Fixing a broken sewer line is critical for maintaining sanitation in homes and commercial properties, especially those with aging systems. 

Sanitary plumbing

Sanitary plumbing covers hygiene-focused systems like toilets, sinks, and showers in homes and commercial spaces. Services like installing a cistern and toilet, and fixing a leaking toilet are common, especially during bathroom renovations or when fixtures malfunction. 

Choose your plumbing business niche

Specialising in a niche like emergency repairs or residential services helps you stand out and meet specific client needs. It ensures that your services align with local demand and build a loyal customer base.

Residential plumbing business niche

Residential plumbing focuses on household needs like leak repairs, fixture installations, and pipe replacements. Services such as choosing a rainwater tank for sustainability or offering water leak detection appeal to eco-conscious homeowners. 

With high demand in urban and suburban areas, this niche provides steady work and opportunities for long-term client relationships through routine maintenance.

  • Pros: Large customer base and consistent demand.
  • Cons: High competition and balancing emergency calls with scheduled jobs.

Emergency plumbing business niche

Emergency plumbing provides 24/7 solutions for urgent issues like burst pipes, sewer backups, and gas leaks. Offering services such as installing a battery sump pump ensures clients are prepared for unexpected flooding during storms. 

This niche attracts high-value clients willing to pay premium rates for immediate assistance, especially during weekends and holidays.

  • Pros: Premium pricing and a strong reputation for reliability.
  • Cons: Stressful schedules and high costs for 24/7 readiness.

Gas fitting and hot water systems niche

The gas fitting and hot water systems niche specialises in installing and maintaining gas lines and energy-efficient water heating systems like solar hot water systems. Services cater to homeowners upgrading to eco-friendly options, and businesses seeking reliable and efficient gas fitting setups. 

The demand for these solutions creates opportunities for high-paying projects and long-term maintenance contracts.

  • Pros: High rates and steady repeat business.
  • Cons: Requires advanced certifications and involves higher liability risks.
A wall-mounted gas fitting system connected to a Rinnai hot water storage unit, illustrating a professionally installed energy-efficient water heating setup
The gas fitting and hot water systems niche focuses on expert installation and maintenance of gas lines and energy-efficient water heating solutions for homes and businesses | Source: Parkway Plumbing Solutions

Roof and gutter plumbing niche

Roof and gutter plumbing focuses on installing and maintaining drainage systems like gutters, downpipes, and flashings. Services include clearing blockages, fixing leaks, and managing stormwater to prevent property damage. 

This niche sees increased demand during rainy seasons and after severe weather, which offers steady work and opportunities for preventative maintenance plans.

  • Pros: Differentiates your business and ensures steady revenue.
  • Cons: Requires specialised tools and comes with safety risks.

Commercial and industrial plumbing

Commercial and industrial plumbing serves businesses and large facilities with extensive plumbing needs. Services include installing large-scale water systems, maintaining backflow prevention devices, and servicing complex drainage networks. This niche offers higher profit margins and opportunities for long-term contracts with schools, hospitals, and other institutions.

  • Pros: High revenue potential and steady contracts.
  • Cons: Requires advanced skills and often involves long payment cycles.

Decide on the service area for your plumbing business

Determining where to establish or expand your plumbing business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for plumbing services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for plumbing services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional plumbers in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Plumbing Job Demand
Plumbing services in Melbourne26.09%
Plumbing services Sydney20.34%
Plumbing services in Perth18.34%
Plumbing services in Brisbane12.79%
Plumbing services in Adelaide4.65%

Australian cities with the highest plumbing job demand

Melbourne leads with 26.09% of the total plumbing job demand in 2024. This significant share can be attributed to Melbourne’s ongoing infrastructure projects, high population density, and thriving property market. These factors collectively increase the need for plumbing services, including repairs, installations, and maintenance.

Sydney follows with 20.34% of the demand, driven by its dense urban development, large residential population, and commercial construction activity. Sydney’s dynamic property market, including frequent renovations and building upgrades, also boosts demand for professional plumbers.

Perth ranks third with 18.34%, reflecting its strong residential construction market and the city’s efforts to modernise and maintain infrastructure. Despite being smaller in population than Melbourne and Sydney, Perth’s demand is bolstered by a steady growth in suburban developments.

Australian cities with lower plumbing job demand

Brisbane, with 12.79% of the total demand, represents a mid-tier market. While its demand is lower compared to Melbourne and Sydney, Brisbane benefits from its expanding population and suburban growth, which supports consistent demand for plumbing services.

Adelaide represents a smaller market, capturing just 4.65% of the demand. Business owners targeting smaller cities like Adelaide can differentiate themselves by offering niche services such as eco-friendly plumbing solutions, or specialising in certain services such as heritage property maintenance. 

By focusing on these strategic approaches, you can establish your plumbing businesses even in regions with lower demand.

Understanding seasonal trends in the plumbing industry is crucial for managing demand fluctuations and optimising your operations. Certain times of the year may see a surge in client requests, such as during winter when hot water systems fail or pipes burst, while other periods may slow down. 

By aligning your services with seasonal needs—like offering preventive maintenance before peak seasons—you can maintain steady revenue and ensure the long-term stability of your plumbing business, regardless of demand fluctuations.

A plumber working on the wiring of a hot water system, using tools and a multimeter to ensure proper installation and functionality
Planning for seasonal trends in the plumbing industry helps you manage demand fluctuations and maintain efficient operations throughout the year | Source: Free Flow Plumbing

Identify popular seasons for plumbing services

According to Oneflare’s 2024 data on the total job postings for each type of service, the top three peak months for plumbing services in Australia in 2024 are July, January, and April.

The demand for plumbing services in July peaks likely due to the mid-winter season, when colder temperatures lead to an increase in issues such as burst pipes and water heater failures. Additionally, the heavy use of indoor plumbing during winter contributes to the higher demand.

January marks the second-highest demand, potentially driven by summer-related plumbing issues such as water tank repairs or installations to manage higher water usage. Post-holiday property maintenance and renovations also contribute to this trend.

April shows another significant rise in demand, coinciding with the autumn season. This period might see a surge in maintenance and repair work as homeowners prepare for winter.

Peak season for pipe repair

Pipe repairs are the busiest during June, July, and May. Cold winter temperatures can cause pipes to freeze or crack, leading to a surge in emergency repair requests. Many homeowners also schedule repairs during this time to prevent leaks and flooding in preparation for wetter seasons.

Peak season for pipe installation

Pipe installations see the highest demand in July, February, and April. These months are associated with renovation projects and addressing issues caused by winter weather. Homeowners often upgrade or replace pipes during these periods to ensure long-term durability and efficiency.

Peak season for plumbing inspections

Plumbing inspections are most in demand in February, December, and June. These months align with periods of seasonal maintenance, as homeowners plan upgrades or repairs before summer and winter. Post-holiday inspections in February and December are particularly common to address strain caused by increased household usage.

Peak season for water tank installation

The demand for water tank installation peaks in September, December, and July. September marks the start of spring, a time when homeowners prepare for increased water usage during warmer months by investing in water storage solutions. 

December and July coincide with preparations for summer and winter, as homeowners seek to maximise water efficiency for garden irrigation or stockpile water for drier or colder months.

Peak season for water heater repair

Water heater repairs are in highest demand during May, April, and July. These months coincide with transitions to colder weather, as households rely more heavily on functional hot water systems. During this period, many homeowners discover inefficiencies or breakdowns in their water heaters and prioritise repairs to ensure a consistent hot water supply.

Peak season for toilet repair and installation

The demand for toilet installation peaks in March, June, and July, while the demand for toilet repair peaks in May, July, and August. Homeowners often choose these months for repair or replacements after issues arise post-holiday season or mid-year.

Peak season for sink and tap repair

Sink and tap repairs are most in demand during April, January, and July. High water usage during the summer months (January) often exposes issues like leaks or reduced water pressure, leading to increased repair needs. Seasonal maintenance during April and July is also common as homeowners prepare for changes in water usage or address persistent issues.

Peak season for sink installation

Demand for sink installations peaks in March, January, and June. These months often align with home renovation timelines, particularly at the start of the year when homeowners prioritise upgrades. Mid-year projects during June may also drive demand as families prepare for entertaining during winter or school holidays.

Peak season for shower and bathtub repair

Repairs for showers and bathtubs peak in July, April, and March. Cold weather during winter increases wear and tear on bathroom fixtures, leading to a rise in repair requests. Additionally, homeowners often address long-standing issues during seasonal maintenance periods in preparation for family gatherings or winter holidays.

Peak season for roof leak repair

Roof leak repairs are busiest in April, February, and March. Seasonal rainfall during autumn highlights vulnerabilities in roofing systems, prompting homeowners to seek immediate repairs. Addressing leaks early helps prevent further water damage and prepares homes for wetter months ahead.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

Anticipate shifts in demand by tailoring services to seasonal needs, like pipe insulation in winter or gutter maintenance in fall. Use marketing campaigns to promote timely solutions and ensure staffing flexibility to handle peak periods effectively.

Offer seasonal plumbing maintenance packages

Seasonal plumbing packages help clients avoid common issues like frozen pipes in winter or clogged gutters in fall. By bundling services such as pipe insulation, drain cleaning, and irrigation maintenance, you can create value while encouraging repeat business. Promoting these packages through discounts or annual contracts keeps your business relevant year-round.

Diversify plumbing service offerings

Expanding your services helps you maintain a steady income during slower seasons. Adding options like green plumbing solutions or pipe relining opens new markets and attracts different client segments. Investing in staff training and promoting these services ensures your business stays competitive and adaptable year-round.

Invest in emergency plumbing services 

Emergency plumbing services help you generate premium income by offering 24/7 solutions for urgent problems like burst pipes or gas leaks. Maintaining a responsive team with well-equipped vehicles ensures you’re ready for any situation, including emergency water heater repairs during winter. Highlighting your availability through online ads and local directories builds trust and establishes your business as the go-to option for reliable service.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring plumbing clients

Using lead generation platforms like Oneflare is an effective strategy for plumbing lead generation and building a steady client base. This platform can connect you with customers actively searching for services, which helps you learn how to generate plumbing leads efficiently. Optimise your profile with detailed service descriptions and quick responses to inquiries to boost credibility and attract repeat clients.

A Oneflare profile for Rhino Plumbing & Drainage Pty. Limited, showcasing qualifications, customer reviews, and service details to help clients find trusted plumbing professionals.
Leveraging lead generation platforms like Oneflare can help plumbing businesses connect with potential clients and establish a reliable customer base.

Register your plumbing business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted plumbers like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the plumbing industry

Study the average costs for plumbing services like drain cleaning, water heater installations, and emergency repairs to understand pricing benchmarks. Knowing the rates for standard services and large-scale projects helps you set competitive prices while maintaining profitability. Analysing competitors’ unique selling points and customer feedback ensures your business stays relevant and appealing.

Understand the cost of common plumbing services

The cost of most plumbing services depends on several factors, including the type of service, job complexity, and whether it’s an emergency. Knowing how much it costs to hire a plumber for tasks like shower installations or bathroom renovations helps you set realistic pricing and budget effectively.

Here’s a breakdown of the typical costs for various plumbing services in Australia:

Type of Plumbing ServiceAverage Cost Range
General plumbing services cost$120 to $230 for installation, maintenance, or replacement tasks.
Pipe repairs cost$130 to $230 for addressing issues like corrosion or leaks
Shower, tub, or sink services cost$120 to $220 for installations or repairs
Toilet repairs cost$130 to $250 for fixing common toilet issues
Drain unblocking cost$50 to $250, depending on the severity of the blockage
Toilet installation cost$60 to $130 per hour for labour; total costs range from $150 to $1,000
Shower installation cost$1,400 to $6,500, including unit and installation costs
Pipe relining cost$300 to $1,000 per metre, depending on pipe size and condition
Bathroom renovations cost$5,000 to $25,000+, varying with the scope of work
Emergency plumbing services cost$150 to $300 for urgent calls, with higher rates after hours

These costs are estimates and can vary based on location, complexity, and the plumber’s expertise. When planning your pricing, always consider additional factors like material costs or after-hours rates. Researching local rates ensures your pricing stays competitive and reflects realistic market expectations.

Decide how to charge for plumbing services

Determining how much to charge for plumbing depends on several factors, including local market rates and the complexity of the job. Material costs, travel expenses, and certifications also play a role in setting fair pricing that covers your overheads. Using a plumbing service invoice template ensures transparency in your charges, helping you build trust with clients while maintaining competitive rates.

Hourly rate for labour-intensive plumbing repairs

Charging an hourly rate is ideal for labour-intensive tasks like leak repairs or diagnosing complex issues, where the time required can vary. This method allows a plumber to bill transparently based on actual labour, which works well for unpredictable jobs. However, it’s crucial to track time accurately to avoid disputes and ensure fair pricing for both parties.

Fixed price per service for standard plumbing services

A fixed price works best for standard and routine jobs like faucet replacements, toilet installations, or drain cleaning. Customers appreciate predictable costs, which makes it easier to build trust and stand out from competitors. However, a thorough evaluation of time and material costs is essential to avoid losses if a job takes longer than expected.

Call-out fee plus service costs for emergency plumbing

For emergency plumbing, combining a call-out fee with hourly service charges ensures fair compensation for urgent, unscheduled work. This approach covers travel time, initial assessments, and after-hours availability for issues like burst pipes or sewer backups. While higher fees may deter non-urgent clients, efficient scheduling helps manage costs and maintain customer satisfaction.

Per metre pricing for large-scale projects

Per metre pricing works well for large-scale jobs like installing sewer lines or drainage networks. This method provides clear cost estimates for predictable material and labour needs, which makes it ideal for competitive bidding. However, thorough planning is essential to account for terrain, material variations, and any unexpected challenges.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Your USPs define what sets your plumbing business apart from competitors and attract the right clients. Features like 24/7 emergency services or eco-friendly plumbing solutions can enhance your appeal. Highlighting these advantages in your marketing ensures customers understand the value your business offers.

24/7 emergency plumbing services with rapid response times

Offering 24/7 emergency services ensures you’re ready to handle urgent issues like burst pipes or gas leaks anytime. Rapid response builds trust and positions your business as the go-to option during critical situations. Implementing GPS tracking for efficient dispatch and showcasing testimonials highlights your reliability to potential clients.

Upfront pricing with no hidden costs

Providing upfront pricing shows transparency, helping clients trust your services and avoid billing disputes. Breaking down labour, materials, and other fees in an invoice template for plumbing services simplifies decision-making and allows customers to budget confidently. Promoting this practice as “no hidden fees” in your marketing materials emphasises your commitment to fairness and reliability.

Specialised expertise in eco-friendly plumbing solutions

Eco-friendly plumbing services attract customers looking to reduce their environmental impact and save on utility bills. Offering solutions like water-efficient fixtures and rainwater harvesting systems positions your business as a sustainability leader. Highlighting certifications and partnerships with green organisations in your marketing reinforces your expertise and commitment to eco-conscious practices.

Guaranteed workmanship with extended warranties

Providing guaranteed workmanship with extended warranties reassures customers of the quality and reliability of your services. Clear warranty terms protect clients from unexpected repair costs and differentiate your business from competitors. Using phrases like “guaranteed satisfaction” in your marketing builds trust and positions your business as a dependable choice.

A Oneflare listing highlighting unique selling points of a plumbing service, including 24/7 availability, friendly plumbers, and services in the South Adelaide area
Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your plumbing business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: Dobbies Plumbing and Building

Step 4: Explore funding options for your plumbing business

Securing funding for your plumbing business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business meeting with a plumber in formal attire reviewing documents and discussing funding opportunities
An aspiring plumbing business owner consulting a professional advisor about financial strategies and funding options | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial plumbing business supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your plumbing business, like vehicles, plumbing tools, and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup plumbing businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic plumbing business plan

Starting a plumbing business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

A plumber analysing a business plan document with graphs and charts on a desk next to a laptop
A plumber analysing a detailed business plan with charts and graphs in preparation for starting a photography business | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your plumbing business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your plumbing business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your plumbing business description

Your plumbing business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your plumbing business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your plumbing business niche and types of services

The next step is to define the focus of your plumbing business, whether it’s general plumbing repairs, pipe installations, hot water system services, or a specialised niche such as eco-friendly plumbing or emergency plumbing services.

Clarify why you chose this niche and provide a brief description of your target market. For example, your target audience could include homeowners needing reliable plumbing repairs, businesses seeking large-scale commercial plumbing solutions, or clients looking for specialised offerings like water-saving devices, energy-efficient hot water systems, or 24/7 emergency response services.

A plumber preparing equipment from a branded van for a 24-hour emergency plumbing service
Clearly defining your plumbing business niche and services, like 24-hour emergency repairs, in your business plan ensures focused marketing and client attraction | Source: SGT Plumbing

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and plumbing business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your plumbing services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of plumbing services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a plumbing business, such as water damage to properties during repairs, injuries sustained while working with heavy tools or in confined spaces, and potential complications with gas or water line installations. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance, or workers’ compensation insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new plumbing services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your plumbing business

To start a plumbing business, you may need to obtain certain a plumbing business license, registrations, and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government. 

Step 7: Hire your plumbers

Building a reliable team for your plumbers business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire plumbers and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

Two plumbers working on a roof to install or repair a roofing system under sunny outdoor conditions
Building a skilled and reliable team is a cornerstone for the success and growth of your plumbing business | Source: Fielding Plumbing Bathroom & Roofing

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as repairing leaks, installing new pipes, maintaining hot water systems, unblocking drains, or designing customised plumbing solutions) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and find the right plumbers for your business, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, plumbing skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask how they managed challenging plumbing projects in the past, dealt with unexpected complications like burst pipes or hard-to-access repairs, or met tight deadlines while delivering high-quality plumbing results and ensuring customer satisfaction.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your plumbers will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Start with training sessions to introduce them to your plumbing business’s standards, client communication protocols, and the specific workflows or tools they’ll use to ensure efficient and high-quality plumbing services.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your staff. 

Step 8: Invest in the right plumbing tools and equipment

Equipping your business with the right tools ensures you can handle a variety of plumbing tasks efficiently. Here’s a breakdown of key plumbing tools and equipment that you’ll most likely need, their estimated costs, and where to purchase them in Australia:

Plumbing Tools and EquipmentPrice RangeWhere to Buy
Pipe wrenches$30 – $150Total Tools
Basin wrenches$20 – $100Reece
Tube cutters$15 – $200Plumbing Sales
Plumber’s torch$50 – $200Sydney Tools
Pipe benders$100 – $500Tools Warehouse
Drain snakes and augers$50 – $300VEVOR
Plumber’s plungers$10 – $50Mitre 10
Inspection cameras$200 – $1,000+SECA
Crimping tools$100 – $400Plumbers Best
Safety gear (gloves, goggles, etc.)$20 – $150Plumbing Sales

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary depending on retailers, brands, and product quality.

Step 9: Find clients for your plumbing business

To learn how to get more plumbing clients, focus on building an online presence, using lead generation platforms, and responding quickly to quotes. Encourage reviews and referrals to establish trust and grow your customer base.

Expand your online presence

An online presence is important for attracting clients and showcasing your plumbing services. Start with a professional website that highlights your expertise, services, and customer testimonials. Use SEO and social media platforms to improve visibility and reach more local clients searching for reliable plumbers.

Build your plumbing business website

A website is essential for establishing your plumbing business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful plumbing business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

Clean and Clear Plumbing’s website

Clean and Clear Plumbing’s website features a clean, professional design with easy navigation. Services are clearly listed, and contact information is prominently displayed, which makes it simple for clients to reach out. The inclusion of customer testimonials builds trust and credibility.

Clean and Clear Plumbing website showcasing current promotions and booking options
A user-friendly website like Clean and Clear Plumbing can effectively showcase promotions and services, making it easy for customers to book and learn more | Source: Clean and Clear Plumbing
Enviromate Plumbing & Roofing’s website

Enviromate Plumbing & Roofing’s website emphasises eco-friendly services, appealing to environmentally conscious clients. It provides detailed information about their offerings and showcases certifications, which reinforces their expertise. The responsive design ensures a seamless experience across devices.

Enviromate Plumbing website with service areas, emergency support details, and service descriptions
Enviromate Plumbing’s website highlights service areas and emergency support, proving the value of clear navigation and detailed service descriptions | Source: Enviromate Plumbing and Roofing
Dr. Leak Plumbing Services’ website

Dr Leak’s website highlights their 24/7 availability and quick response times, crucial for emergency services. The site includes clear calls to action, such as “Book a Plumber,” facilitating immediate client engagement. A blog section offers valuable tips, which positions them as knowledgeable professionals.

Dr. Leak Plumbing website featuring unique selling points and an online inquiry form
Dr. Leak Plumbing demonstrates how a well-designed website can highlight unique selling points and streamline customer inquiries with simple online forms | Source: Dr leak plumbing

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for plumbing businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for plumbing services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your plumbing expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

Plumblast Plumbing Services profile on Oneflare highlighting reviews, qualifications, and business details for customer trust.
Listing your plumbing business on lead-generation platforms like Oneflare can significantly boost visibility and connect you with potential clients | Source: Plumblast Plumbing Services

Get started on Oneflare by registering your plumbing business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

Google search results for plumber reviews in Perth, showcasing SEO and paid search effectiveness for increased visibility.
Utilising SEO and paid search strategies can enhance your plumbing business’s online visibility, driving more organic traffic to your website | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your plumbing services and client works visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a plumbing business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

GXR Plumbing – Facebook advertising

GXR Plumbing and Gas maintains an engaging Facebook page that effectively attracts clients. The page showcases its services through regular updates, photos, and videos of completed projects. This consistent activity highlights its expertise and builds trust with potential clients. 

The page also features customer reviews and testimonials, which provide social proof of its quality work. By maintaining an active and informative presence, GXR Plumbing effectively engages with its audience and attracts new clients.

Screenshot of GXR Plumbing and Gas Pty Ltd's Facebook page, featuring services, photos, and engaging updates to attract clients
GXR Plumbing and Gas leverages its Facebook page to attract clients with engaging updates, showcasing expertise through photos, videos, and project highlights | GXR Plumbing
Plumbing Bros – Instagram advertising

Plumbing Bros’ Instagram presence features a consistent brand image, which showcases high-quality visuals of completed projects, relatable and fun memes, and team activities. This approach humanises the business, which in return, helps attract and retain clients.

They regularly post informative content, including plumbing tips and behind-the-scenes glimpses, which positions them as experts in the field. Utilising Instagram stories and reels, they share real-time updates and short videos, which enhances engagement and keeps their audience informed.

Screenshot of Plumbing Bros’ Instagram profile, featuring high-quality visuals of completed projects, team activities, and engaging posts to humanise their brand.
Plumbing Bros effectively use Instagram to highlight their expertise and brand personality through visuals and team activities, building client trust and loyalty | Source: Plumbing Bros
Sydney’s Drain Men – TikTok advertising

Sydney’s Drain Men effectively leverage TikTok to engage clients and showcase their plumbing services. Their account features videos highlighting services like drain cleaning and emergency repairs, providing potential clients with a clear understanding of their offerings.

By using popular hashtags and engaging content, they increase their visibility and appeal to a broader audience. This approach not only demonstrates their expertise but also builds trust with potential clients seeking reliable plumbing solutions.

Screenshot of Sydney's Drain Men TikTok profile, displaying videos of plumbing services such as drain cleaning and emergency repairs to engage and inform clients
Sydney’s Drain Men use TikTok to creatively showcase their plumbing services, including drain cleaning and emergency repairs, helping clients understand their expertise | Source: Sydney’s Drain Men

Build your plumbing business’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new plumbing clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

Screenshot of plumbing client reviews on Oneflare, highlighting positive feedback and verified ratings to build trust with potential clients
Client reviews are the cornerstone of trust. Encourage your satisfied customers to leave feedback on platforms like Oneflare to showcase your reliability and attract new clients | Source: Dobbies Plumbing and Building

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win plumbing jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks. 

Step 10: Get paid for your plumbing services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your plumbing services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a person tapping a 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen, highlighting the convenience of accepting online payments for plumbing services
A person using convenient online payment to pay for a videography service | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a plumbing business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable plumbing services invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free plumbing invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s plumbing invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's invoice design interface
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing plumbing invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s plumbing invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for different businesses, like a plumbing business. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for plumbing services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s plumbing invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help plumbing businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s plumbing invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organized layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for plumbing businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking plumbing services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Your path to success starts here — grow your plumbing business today!

Being a plumber isn’t just a trade, it’s your chance to create a business that puts you in control of your future. From planning and certifications to building a strong online presence, every step brings you closer to success. Whether you’re starting with small residential jobs or expanding into larger projects, having the right approach makes all the difference.

Ready to take the first step? Register your business on Oneflare and post your services to start connecting with potential clients. Oneflare makes it easy to showcase your expertise, attract leads, and grow your business in a competitive market. Start building your future and let Oneflare help you reach your goals!


FAQs on how to start a plumbing business

What are the benefits of green plumbing?

Green plumbing reduces water and energy consumption, lowering clients’ utility bills and promoting sustainability. It also attracts eco-conscious customers and helps businesses comply with increasing environmental regulations.

How can I scale my plumbing business in the future?

Diversify your services, leverage digital tools like CRM software, and expand your service areas. Invest in staff training, partnerships, and marketing to enhance visibility and improve operational efficiency.

How much does it cost to start a plumbing business?

Starting a plumbing business can cost between $20,000–$40,000 for solo operations and $50,000–$100,000 for larger setups, including tools, licensing, vehicles, and marketing.

Categories
Business guides

How to start a videography business

Launching a videography business combines creativity, passion, and a sharp eye for detail. For aspiring videographers with limited resources, the journey might feel overwhelming, but with the right guidance, you can master how to start a videography business and turn your talent into a profitable venture. Whether you’re documenting family milestones or producing personal projects to build a portfolio, the opportunities are endless.

In this guide, we’ll cover everything from landing your first client to scaling your business into high-demand services. Let’s get started.

Step 1: Identify the market of your videography business

Understanding your target audience is crucial for offering the right videography service. From couples looking to preserve their wedding day memories to businesses hiring a professional videographer for promotional content, knowing what your market values help shape your offerings. This clarity ensures your services align with demand, setting you up for steady growth and profitability.

Explore different types of video services

Offering diverse types of videography services allows you to cater to specific markets and grow your business. Each service has unique demands, challenges, and opportunities, so it’s important to choose ones that align with your skills and resources.

Wedding videography

Weddings are one of the most in-demand markets for videographers due to their emotional significance and the desire for lasting memories. As a wedding videographer, you’ll focus on capturing heartfelt moments like wedding vows and readings, candid emotions, and key ceremonies.

Offering options like cinematic edits, full-day coverage, or highlight reels allows you to tailor your services to different client needs.

A bride in a white gown and veil smiles while standing with her bridesmaids dressed in matching blue dresses, holding bouquets of flowers
Wedding videography that captures the joy and beauty of a wedding day | Source: Starlight Productions

Corporate videography

Corporate videography offers consistent opportunities for businesses needing videos for promotions, training, and internal communications. As a corporate videographer, your work focuses on producing high-quality content that aligns with a company’s branding and messaging. Projects often include product launches, testimonials, recruitment materials, and employee training videos.

Event videography

Event videography is ideal for capturing live moments at concerts, conferences, trade shows, and milestone celebrations. Your role as an event videographer involves real-time coverage and creating compelling stories that highlight key moments and the event’s atmosphere. Deliverables typically include recap videos, promotional reels, or live-streamed content.

A group of people participating in an outdoor event, raising their arms in sync with an instructor on stage
Event videography captures the energy and excitement of live experiences, preserving every moment from dynamic performances to audience engagement | Source: Lensloop

Promotional and social media video content

Promotional and social media video content is in high demand as businesses, influencers, and brands prioritise engaging their online audiences. As a videographer, you’ll create short, dynamic videos tailored for platforms like Instagram, TikTok, and YouTube. These videos often focus on storytelling, product demonstrations, or boosting brand visibility.

Educational and training videos

Educational and training videos are essential for businesses, schools, and online course creators aiming to provide clear and engaging instructional content. These videos focus on explaining concepts or processes through tutorials, how-to guides, and employee training sessions. As a videographer, your priority is to ensure clarity and simplicity while using visuals to enhance understanding.

Documentary films

Documentary films are perfect for filmmakers passionate about authentic storytelling and exploring social, historical, or cultural topics. These projects often involve interviews, real-world footage, and in-depth research to present compelling narratives. They’re ideal for covering societal issues, unique events, or personal stories.

Entertainment videos

Entertainment videos are a vibrant niche for creative videographers. This niche focuses on covering music videos, comedy skits, and web series. These projects prioritise captivating visuals, engaging storytelling, and innovative techniques to hold the audience’s attention. Collaborating with entertainers, artists, and creators makes this a dynamic and exciting field.

Real estate videography

Real estate videography is essential for showcasing properties, from luxury homes to commercial spaces. As a videographer, your job is to highlight each property’s best features through walk-throughs and detailed interior shots. This style of video helps real estate agents and developers attract buyers and stand out in a competitive market.

Drone videography

Drone videography is highly sought after for its ability to capture stunning aerial views of landscapes, buildings, and events. It’s often used to add unique perspectives to real estate tours, promotional videos, and large-scale productions. As a videographer, offering drone services can significantly elevate the production value of your work.

Choose your videography business niche

Selecting a niche helps you focus your skills and target the right clients. Whether it’s weddings or corporate work, specialising in certain areas can make your business stand out in a competitive market. This ensures you build expertise and attract clients who value your unique services.

Wedding and event videography niche

Wedding and event videography focuses on capturing emotional moments and milestone celebrations like weddings, anniversaries, and birthdays. This niche requires strong storytelling skills, quick adaptability to unpredictable conditions, and an ability to capture candid emotions. Offering wedding photography services within this niche could also enhance your business.

Typical clients include couples, families, and event organisers, offering steady demand. 

  • Pros: High emotional value and consistent demand with referral opportunities.
  • Cons: Weekend work and unpredictable event conditions.

Corporate and commercial videography

Corporate and commercial videography involves creating professional videos for businesses, including promotional content, training materials, and internal communications. This niche requires strong brand storytelling, precise editing, and polished visuals that align with corporate goals. 

Clients typically include startups, established companies, and advertising agencies, which offer opportunities for long-term contracts.

  • Pros: High-paying clients from recurring work from businesses needing regular content.
  • Cons: Tight deadlines and strict adherence to brand guidelines.

Real estate and drone videography niche

Real estate and drone videography focus on creating visually stunning property showcases for realtors, developers, and architects. This niche requires expertise in lighting, aerial filming, and composition to highlight architectural details effectively. High-quality drone footage adds dynamic perspectives, which makes properties stand out in competitive markets.

  • Pros: Growing demand and premium pay for drone-enhanced property videos.
  • Cons: High equipment costs and strict legal regulations for drone operations.
An aerial view of a large, modern property surrounded by landscaped gardens, a pond, and a natural wooded area
Real estate and drone videography showcase stunning properties, helping realtors, developers, and architects stand out | Source: Alberts, Eugene Paul

Music and entertainment videography niche

Music and entertainment videography covers projects like music videos, live performances, comedy skits, and web series. This niche demands strong creative direction, cinematic storytelling, and the ability to sync visuals seamlessly with music. 

Clients include musicians, bands, and producers seeking visually engaging content.

  • Pros: Highly creative projects that let you showcase unique storytelling and innovation.
  • Cons: Competitive market with inconsistent budgets and tight production schedules.

Social media and content creation videography

Social media videography specialises in creating short, engaging videos for platforms like Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, and Facebook. This niche requires trendspotting, quick editing, and tailoring content to each platform’s specific requirements. Clients often include influencers, brands, and content creators who need regular updates to maintain their online presence.

  • Pros: High demand for short-form videos and potential for steady income through retainer contracts.
  • Cons: Constantly evolving trends and tight deadlines can be challenging to keep up with.

Decide on the service area for your videography business

Determining where to establish or expand your videography business is crucial for its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for videography services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to thrive.

The table below highlights the demand for videography services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional videographers in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Videography Job Demand
Videography services in Sydney24.3%
Videography services in Melbourne19.7%
Videography services in Brisbane10.5%
Videography services in Perth10.3%
Videography services in Adelaide3.9%

Australian cities with the highest videography job demand

Sydney accounts for 24.3% of the total videography job demand in 2024. This high percentage reflects Sydney’s vibrant cultural and commercial hub, where numerous events, including weddings, corporate gatherings, and media production projects, require professional videography services. The city’s large population and the thriving film and entertainment industries also contribute to the steady demand.

Following closely, Melbourne holds 19.7% of the demand share. Its demand is driven by a dynamic cultural scene with frequent public and private events, including arts festivals, conferences, and an active small business sector that requires promotional content. Melbourne’s growing reputation as a creative and film industry centre further supports the high demand for videography services.

Brisbane stands as a mid-tier market, representing 10.5% of total demand. This is likely driven by the city’s expanding event management industry and the increasing number of personal events like weddings and celebrations, which often require videography services. Brisbane’s rapid urbanisation also attracts corporate videography opportunities.

Australian cities with lower videography job demand

While Perth represents a moderate share at 10.3%, its lower ranking compared to Sydney and Melbourne indicates a smaller, yet significant, market. Perth’s demand comes from the corporate and event sectors, albeit on a smaller scale, and businesses here can capitalise by offering niche services like drone videography or specialised editing.

Adelaide, Gold Coast, and Central Coast present challenges due to their smaller population and fewer large-scale events. However, businesses in this area can focus on building strong relationships with local clients and targeting the region’s wedding market or the growing number of startups requiring promotional videos. By specialising in high-quality, bespoke services, businesses in smaller markets can stand out and maintain steady growth despite lower overall demand.

Understanding seasonal trends in the videography business can help you manage demand fluctuations and optimise your operations.

For example, wedding videographers often experience a surge in bookings during the autumn and summer months when outdoor ceremonies are most popular. Similarly, event videographers see high demand during corporate events and festival seasons.

Some months bring a significant influx of clients, while others slow down, making it essential to plan ahead. Strategically adapting to these cycles ensures consistent revenue and business stability throughout the year.

A street performer dressed in striking, artistic attire plays a wind instrument while holding a large metal bowl
Understanding seasonal trends in the videography business helps you manage demand fluctuations and optimise your services year-round | Source: Stream Machine – The Australian Production Company

Identify popular seasons for video services

Based on 2024 job posting data on Oneflare, videography services show strong demand in February, April, and May, driven by seasonal events and consumer activities. February marks the peak demand due to summer events, including weddings, festivals, and corporate gatherings that require professional video coverage. The trend reflects the high engagement of Australians in personal and public celebrations during late summer.

April follows as a peak month, coinciding with the Easter season, where videography is in demand for family gatherings, community events, and corporate promotional activities. The temperate autumn weather in Australia further encourages outdoor events that often require videography services.

May ranks as another significant month, fuelled by corporate demand for fiscal-year-end presentations and marketing campaigns. Personal events like Mother’s Day and weddings also contribute to the heightened activity.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

Understanding industry cycles and focusing on creating good video content can help you navigate peak and off-peak seasons. During slower months, proactive outreach and seasonal marketing campaigns keep your brand visible and relevant. Planning ahead ensures you maintain steady work despite fluctuations in demand.

Diversify videography services

Expanding your services helps you maintain steady work when demand fluctuates. Offering options like corporate training videos, real estate walkthroughs, or product promotions ensures you’re not reliant on a single niche. Many clients who hire a videographer for one purpose may need additional services, which gives you opportunities to upsell.

Offer seasonal promotions for your videography services

Seasonal promotions help attract clients during high-demand and slower periods alike. Offer timely discounts for holiday-themed projects like corporate parties or family reunions, or provide advance booking deals during off-peak months. These strategies encourage clients to secure your services early and keep your schedule full.

Build partnerships with local businesses

Partnering with local businesses helps you secure steady work and expand your reach. Collaborate with event planners, photographers, or venues to gain referrals for weddings and corporate events. Working with real estate agencies to create property videos can also open doors to consistent opportunities.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring videography clients

Using online platforms for lead generation for video production helps you find clients year-round. Lead generation platforms like Oneflare provide access to leads for seasonal projects and peak-season clients. This platform offers opportunities to build a steady pipeline of work.

Oneflare webpage showcasing top videographers near a specific location, with a list of profiles, customer reviews, star ratings, and options to request quotes for videography services
Using lead generation platforms like Oneflare helps videographers secure clients year-round, ensuring consistent demand and streamlined operations for video production businesses.

Register your videography business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted videographers like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the videography industry

Researching market rates and studying your competitors helps you price your services competitively and identify gaps in the videography market. This ensures you stay relevant and attract the right clients.

Understand the cost of common videography services

The videography cost depends on factors like the project type, length of coverage, and post-production complexity. Additional elements, such as equipment, location, and client-specific requirements, can significantly influence pricing. Experienced videographers often charge more, reflecting their expertise and the quality of their work.

Here’s a breakdown of the typical costs for various videography or video services in Australia:

Types of Videography ServicesPrice Range
Wedding videography cost$2,000 to $4,000 per event
Corporate or commercial videography$500 – $2,500 per project
Event videography$500 – $2,000 per event
Real estate videography$300 – $1,200 per property
Social media content creation$200 – $1,000 per session
Music video production$800 – $3,500 per project

Understanding the cost of common videography services is key to setting realistic expectations and pricing your services competitively. Keep in mind that these figures are estimates and can vary based on factors like location, client needs, and project scope. Always research your market and adjust your pricing to reflect the value and expertise you bring to each project.

Decide how to charge for video services

Set your pricing strategy by aligning it with the service type, market rates, and your desired profit margin. Use a clear videography invoice template to outline costs and avoid client misunderstandings. This ensures transparency and helps you balance expenses while maintaining profitability.

Hourly rate for smaller videography services

Charging an hourly rate works well for small and straightforward projects like interviews, short event coverage, or editing-only jobs. This pricing model is also ideal for clients with uncertain requirements, as it offers flexibility without committing to a fixed package. Typical rates range from $50 to $300 per hour, depending on your expertise and the equipment used.

Per event or per project for larger and event-specific projects

Charging per event or project is ideal for larger, event-specific jobs like weddings, corporate events, or multi-day shoots. Typical pricing ranges from $1,500 to $5,000 for weddings and $2,000 to $10,000 for corporate events, depending on the scope and add-ons like drone footage. This model offers clients an all-inclusive price, covering pre-production, shooting, and editing.

Per deliverable for those with clear video goals

Charging per deliverable works well for clients who need specific outputs like a training video, social media clip, or real estate walkthrough. Pricing typically ranges from $500 to $1,000 for short social media clips and $1,000 to $3,000 for real estate videos, depending on complexity. 

Package pricing for those looking for flexible videography services

Package pricing is ideal for clients who need a range of services, like a wedding videographer offering full-day coverage, reels, and drone footage. Typical packages range from $2,000 to $10,000, depending on inclusions like pre-shoot consultations and multiple deliverables. 

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Identify what sets your services apart, whether it’s advanced equipment, quick turnaround times, or a specific niche like drone or wedding videography. Highlighting your USPs helps you stand out and attract the right clients.

Specialised and customised video solutions 

Tailoring your video services to fit client needs sets you apart from competitors. This could mean crafting personalised videography packages with same-day edits or customising corporate content to reflect a brand’s message. Offering niche solutions, like real estate videos with drone footage or unique walkthroughs, adds extra value.

Fast turnaround but high-quality video services

Delivering high-quality videos on tight deadlines appeals to clients with time-sensitive needs. Businesses often require quick promotional content for product launches or campaigns, which makes efficiency just as important as quality. For example, providing event highlights within 24-48 hours or rapidly producing corporate training videos ensures your reliability.

Cinematic storytelling

Cinematic storytelling focuses on creating visually stunning, emotionally engaging content that resonates with viewers. This narrative-driven approach sets your work apart by building deeper connections through compelling stories. It’s especially effective for weddings, documentaries, and music videos where emotions and visuals play a crucial role.

Use of state-of-the-art video equipment and techniques

Leveraging advanced tools like drones, stabilisers, and 4K cameras enhances the quality of your video productions. Clients seeking premium visuals are drawn to videographers who use cutting-edge equipment and techniques. This commitment to innovation helps you stand out in a competitive market.

Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your videography business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer.

Step 4: Explore funding options for your videography business

Securing funding for your videography business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business meeting with a videographer in formal attire reviewing documents and discussing funding opportunities
An aspiring videography business owner consulting a professional advisor about financial strategies and funding options | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial videography supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your videography business, like vehicles and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup videography businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic videography business plan

Starting a videography business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

A videographer analysing a business plan document with graphs and charts on a desk next to a laptop
A videographer analysing a detailed business plan with charts and graphs in preparation for starting a photography business | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your videography business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your videography business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your videography business description

Your videography business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your videography business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your videography niche and types of services

The next step is describing what your videography business will focus on, whether it’s wedding videography, event videography, corporate videography, or a specific niche like real estate, drone, or music video production. 

Explain why you chose this niche and include a brief description of your target market. This could be couples planning their dream wedding, businesses looking for polished promotional videos, or musicians wanting visually striking music videos to complement their work.

A flat lay of vibrant, colourful ingredients for a dish, including a bowl of lentil curry topped with tomatoes, spinach, and chillies, surrounded by fresh vegetables, garlic, spices, and lemon wedges on a rustic wooden table
Highlight your videography niche in your business plan, whether it’s food styling, event coverage, or promotional videos | Source: Vanflix

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and videography business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your videography services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of videography services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a videography business, such as equipment theft or damage, technical failures during shoots, client dissatisfaction, or liability issues at filming locations. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance or equipment insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new videography services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your videography business

To start a videography business, you may need to obtain registrations, licenses and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government. 

Step 7: Hire your videographers

Building a reliable team for your videography business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire the right employees for your videography business and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A videographer records an interview with a man in a blue shirt at an industrial setting
Hiring skilled videographers ensures professional production quality, from interviews to promotional videos, helping your business deliver impactful visual content | Source: BC Images

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as wedding videography, event coverage, corporate video production, or promotional content creation) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and hire videographers effectively, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, videography skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For instance, you could ask how they navigated challenging shoots in the past, adapted to unexpected changes in locations or conditions, managed technical issues during filming, or met tight deadlines while ensuring high-quality results for clients.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your videographers will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Begin with training sessions to familiarise them with your videography business’s standards, client interaction protocols, and specific workflows or editing techniques they’ll need to follow. 

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your team members. 

Step 8: Invest in the right videography tools and equipment

Each videography niche requires specialised tools, from cameras and lenses to drones and editing software. Choosing the right equipment ensures you deliver high-quality videos tailored to your clients’ needs.

Bear in mind, though, that each videography niche requires specialised tools and equipment. Here’s a breakdown of some key items and their estimated costs:

Videography Tools and EquipmentPrice RangeWhere to Buy
Camera (DSLR, Mirrorless, or Cinema)$1,000 – $10,000Camera House, Videopro, DigiDirect
Lenses (Prime, Zoom, Specialty)$500 – $4,000Ted’s Cameras, CameraPro, DigiDirect
Tripod with Fluid Head$150 – $1,000Videopro, CameraPro, Miller Tripods
Lighting Equipment (LED Panels, Softboxes)$200 – $2,000Hypop, Videopro, DigiDirect
Audio Equipment (Microphones, Recorders)$150 – $1,500Videopro, CameraPro, RØDE Microphones
Editing Software (e.g., Adobe Premiere Pro)$30 – $80 per monthAdobe
Cloud Storage and Backup$10 – $50 per monthGoogle Drive, Dropbox, OneDrive
External Hard Drive (2TB or more)$100 – $400Officeworks, JB Hi-Fi, Amazon Australia
Memory Cards (SD/CFast)$50 – $200Camera House, Ted’s Cameras, Officeworks
Drone for Aerial Videography$1,500 – $4,000DJI, JB Hi-Fi, DigiDirect
Camera Bag$100 – $400Lowepro, Harvey Norman, Amazon Australia

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary based on the retailer and specific product models.

Step 9: Find clients for your videography business

Knowing how to get clients as a videographer involves using online platforms, networking, and showcasing your portfolio to attract the right audience. Building strong connections and promoting your services effectively is key to growing your client base.

Expand your online presence

A strong online presence boosts your visibility and helps clients find and evaluate your services. Most people search online to find trusted videographers, so a professional digital profile builds trust and credibility. Use your website, social media, and portfolio platforms to showcase your work effectively.

Build your videography business website

A website is essential for establishing your videography business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful videography business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

WGM Productions

WGM Productions’ website presents a straightforward layout that highlights their specialisation in wedding videography and special events. The site emphasises affordability and comprehensive coverage, which appeals to clients seeking value-driven services.

A screenshot of the WGM Video Productions website featuring a smiling bride sitting in a classic red car
Create a professional website like WGM Video Productions to showcase your videography services, highlight your expertise, and attract more clients online | Source: WGM Productions
Bedroom Studio

Bedroom Studio’s website features a clean, modern design with easy navigation, which allows visitors to effortlessly explore their services and portfolio. High-quality visuals and concise content effectively showcase their cinematic wedding films, appealing to potential clients seeking professional videography services.

A screenshot of the Bedroom Studio website featuring a bride and groom walking hand in hand in a picturesque field at sunset
A website like Bedroom Studio’s can enhance your videography business’s visibility, showcasing your portfolio and connecting with potential clients | Source: Butler, Christopher
Ocean Images

Ocean Images’ website offers a user-friendly interface with clear sections detailing their videography and photography services. The inclusion of client testimonials and a comprehensive portfolio builds trust and demonstrates their extensive experience, which makes them an attractive choice for prospective clients.

A screenshot of the Ocean Images Production website featuring a serene coastal scene with paddleboarders on clear turquoise water
Build a visually captivating website like Ocean Images Production to showcase your showreels and demonstrate your videography skills | Source: Ocean Images Production

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for videography businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for videography services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your videography expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

A profile page for MN Videos on Oneflare, showcasing business qualifications, contact details, customer reviews, and a section to request quotes for videography services
Posting on lead-generation platforms like Oneflare is an effective way for videography businesses to connect with potential clients and grow their customer base | Source: MN Videos

Get started on Oneflare by registering your videography business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

A Google search results page for "Best Videographers in Perth," displaying organic listings and paid ads for videography services, including platforms like Oneflare and Airtasker
SEO and paid search are key strategies to boost your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic and connecting with potential clients | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your video work and portfolio visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how social media advertising works. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a videography business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

Clips That Sell – Facebook advertising

Clips That Sell’s Facebook page showcases high-quality videos that demonstrate its expertise across various industries. Regular updates and engaging content keep its audience informed and interested. Client testimonials and case studies build trust and credibility, encouraging potential clients to consider its services.

A Facebook page for "Clips That Sell," showcasing marketing video production services in Melbourne
Use Facebook advertising to showcase your videography business, engage with potential clients, and share your portfolio to drive traffic and generate leads | Source: Clips That Sell
Memento Films – Instagram advertising

Memento Films’ Instagram account provides cinematic wedding highlights and behind-the-scenes content. Its consistent posting schedule and engagement with followers demonstrate reliability and a client-focused approach. This strategy not only highlights its videography skills but also builds trust and connections with potential clients.

The Instagram profile of MementoFilms, showcasing their photography and videography services
Instagram advertising is a powerful tool to promote your videography business. Showcase your best work, engage with clients, and build your brand’s presence to attract more bookings | Source: Memento Films
Quilman Cruz – TikTok advertising

Quilman Cruz’s TikTok account displays engaging videos that highlight their versatility in videography. The account maintains a consistent posting schedule, which keeps the audience engaged and demonstrates reliability. Quilman utilises trending sounds and hashtags to increase visibility and reach a broader audience.

The TikTok profile of Quilman Cruz, a videographer and photographer, showcasing a feed of creative videos, including behind-the-scenes clips, aerial footage, and scenic shots
TikTok advertising lets you showcase your videography skills to a vast audience. Share engaging videos, behind-the-scenes content, and eye-catching visuals to attract potential clients | Source: Quilman Cruz

Build your videography’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

A reviews page on Oneflare showcasing client feedback for photography and videography services
A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on platforms like Oneflare to boost your credibility and attract new clients | Source: Contrast Creative

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks. 

Step 10: Get paid for your videography services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your videography services. Here’s how:

A close-up of a person tapping a 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen, highlighting the convenience of accepting online payments for videography services
A person using convenient online payment to pay for a videography service | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a videography business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable blank videography invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free videography invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s videography invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's invoice design interface
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing videography invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s videography invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for various businesses, such as videography businesses. These templates are compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for videography services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s videography invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help videography businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s videography invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organised layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for videography businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking videography services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Your path to success starts here — launch your videography business today!

Starting a videography business is an exciting journey filled with opportunities to turn your passion into a thriving career. Whether you’re capturing life’s milestones or crafting cinematic stories, every step you take brings you closer to building a successful brand.

Ready to connect with clients and grow your business? Register your business on Oneflare today to reach people looking for skilled videographers and photographers. It’s the perfect platform to showcase your work, attract clients, and build a steady income.

Take the first step toward your dream business and let your creativity shine with Oneflare!


FAQs on how to start a videography business

Are videography businesses profitable?

Yes, videography businesses can be highly profitable due to the growing demand for video content across industries like marketing, real estate, and events. Success depends on offering diverse services, building repeat clients, and effectively managing initial equipment costs.

How to find your niche in video editing?

Start by exploring different project types and assessing your strengths, like storytelling or motion graphics. Research market trends, build a portfolio in underserved niches, and refine your focus based on client feedback and regional demand.

How much does it cost to start a videography business?

Starting a videography business typically costs $5,000 to $10,000 for a basic setup and up to $20,000 for professional equipment and tools. Costs include cameras, lenses, audio gear, editing software, and business essentials like insurance and marketing.

Categories
Business guides

How to start a photography business

We understand that as a photographer, starting your own photography business is not just a way for you to make money, but also a way for you to realise your dream passion project as an artist. But let’s be honest–learning how to start a photography business in Australia is not a walk in the park. You’re probably wondering how to break into the industry without breaking your creative spirit in the process, while working with limited resources.

With the right strategy and the help of this guide, you can build a thriving photography business from scratch. You can figure out how to start a photography business, attract your first clients, manage logistics, and deliver stunning results.  Soon enough, these hurdles will become stepping stones to your success.

Step 1: Identify the market of your photography business

Knowing your audience helps you tailor your services and marketing efforts for maximum impact. This involves researching your local area to determine what types of services are in demand and how your offerings can stand out from competitors. 

Explore different types of photography services

Explore different types of photography styles to refine your offerings and cater to specific client needs.

Wedding photography

Wedding photography captures one of the most memorable days in a couple’s life. As a wedding photographer, you’ll document every precious moment—from the ceremony and candid emotions to group photos and romantic couple portraits.

A newlywed couple shares an intimate moment, silhouetted against the light streaming through a grand church doorway
A silhouette of a newlywed couple framed by a stunning church entrance, embodying the essence of wedding photography | Source: Tamara Little Photography

Portrait photography

Portrait photography centres on individuals, families, or groups, highlighting personality and emotion. This type of photography service includes family shoots, corporate headshots, and even artistic or creative personal photos.

Event photography

Event photography focuses on candidly capturing the energy and key moments of any occasion. This includes events like birthdays, corporate functions, concerts, and community gatherings.

Product photography

Product photography creates visually appealing images of goods for advertising, online stores, and catalogues. It demands attention to lighting, composition, and detail to make products stand out.

Fashion photography

Fashion photography showcases clothing, accessories, and models for magazines, campaigns, and brands. It often blends artistry and storytelling with dramatic visuals and styling.

Travel photography

Travel photography preserves the beauty of destinations, cultures, and landscapes, often for publications, tourism boards, or stock photography. This also needs adaptability and a knack for visual storytelling.

Pet photography

Pet photography, as its name suggests, specialises in portraits of beloved pets to capture their unique personalities. Whether in a studio or a natural setting, pet photography often requires creative engagement and a genuine love for animals.

A close-up of a golden retriever puppy lying on the grass, gazing intently at something off-camera
A golden retriever puppy in a serene outdoor setting, captured through pet photography | Nathan Isaacs Photography

Stock photography

Stock photography takes versatile, generic images of landscapes, people, or objects for stock photo libraries. These images are licensed for use in ads, blogs, and websites, offering passive income opportunities.

Drone photography

Drone photography uses drones to capture stunning aerial perspectives. This service is ideal for real estate, weddings, landscapes, and commercial projects. Drone photography delivers unique views that are otherwise impossible to achieve.

Choose your photography business niche

Now that you know about the type of photography services you can offer, you can zero in on one and expand it or combine multiple types of services to form your niche and attract the right clients. Consider the following photography business niches to establish yourself in the industry:

Portrait photography niche

The portrait photography niche focuses on capturing individuals, families, or groups in posed or candid styles, for personal or professional use. It’s versatile and can accommodate family portraits, corporate headshots, and creative concepts.

  • Pros: Steady demand from clients for diverse occasions.
  • Cons: Highly competitive, so it requires a standout style and excellent interpersonal skills.

Wedding photography niche

Wedding photography documents one of the most important days in your clients’ lives, as they trust you to tell their love story through photos and videos. This requires technical expertise, creativity, and the ability to perform under pressure. This niche may also benefit from incorporating videography services and more wedding business services.

  • Pros: High potential for profitability and client referrals through satisfied couples.
  • Cons: Intense workload, long hours, and high expectations for flawless results.

Commercial photography niche

The commercial photography niche involves creating high-quality visuals for businesses to use in advertising, branding, or product marketing. It’s often used for product photography, real estate photography, and food photography.

  • Pros: Lucrative contracts and repeat business from corporate clients.
  • Cons: Demands specialised equipment, precision, and adaptability to client needs.
A vibrant dish of avocado and leafy greens served on toasted bread, garnished with fresh herbs and placed on a green ceramic plate
A beautifully styled plate of fresh avocado toast, showcasing the artistry of commercial photography | Source: Just B Photography

Event photography niche

The event photography niche captures important celebrations and gatherings, from corporate functions to private parties and community events. Good reflexes, adaptability, and a great sense of timing are required if you’re planning to take over this niche.

  • Pros: Steady demand for milestone celebrations and organisational events.
  • Cons: Unpredictable lighting and environments can make consistent quality a challenge.

Landscape and nature photography niche

The landscape and nature photography niche focuses on showcasing natural beauty, often for prints, publications, or stock libraries. As a landscape photographer, you’ll need some travel experience and an eye for breathtaking compositions to do well in this niche.

  • Pros: Opportunities to monetise personal creative projects and explore unique locations.
  • Cons: Can be time-intensive with unpredictable income and market demand.

Decide on the service area for your photography business

Determining where to establish or expand your photography business is essential to its success. By identifying regions with the highest demand for photography services, you can position yourself in areas where your business is more likely to flourish.

The table below highlights the demand for photography services across various cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down the demand in each city and explore the factors driving the need for professional photographers in these areas.

CityPercentage Share of Total Photography Job Demand
Photography services in Sydney37.2%
Photography services in Melbourne30.8%
Photography services in Brisbane9.9%
Photography services in Gold Coast4.3%
Photography services in Perth2.8%

Australian cities with the highest photography job demand

Sydney, with 37.2% of total demand, stands out as Australia’s largest hub for photography services. The city’s vibrant commercial scene, international tourism, and major events such as corporate conferences and weddings ensure a consistent and high demand for professional photographers. From portrait photography to promotional campaigns, Sydney’s diverse industries provide numerous opportunities for photographers to thrive.

Melbourne, accounting for 30.8% of the demand, is a close second. Known for its artistic culture and festivals, Melbourne offers opportunities in event, fashion, and advertising photography. Specialising in niche areas such as creative photography or corporate marketing photography can help you differentiate yourself in this highly competitive and culturally rich market.

Brisbane holds a significant 9.9% share of demand, driven by its rapidly expanding population and popularity as a wedding and outdoor event destination. The city’s growing business sector and role as a tourism gateway to Queensland create great opportunities for photographers focusing on commercial and travel-related photography. 

Australian cities with lower photography job demand

Outside these major hubs, smaller cities also offer opportunities for photographers like you. The Gold Coast (4.3%) and Perth (2.8%) have comparatively lower demand, but their markets are not without potential. The Gold Coast’s picturesque landscapes make it a hotspot for wedding and lifestyle photography, catering to both locals and tourists. Similarly, Perth provides opportunities in regional tourism and corporate photography, especially with its growing local businesses and small-scale events.

In these smaller markets, photographers can build strong client relationships by offering personalised services. Specialising in areas such as destination weddings, nature photography, or small business branding could help professionals establish themselves in these regions. Additionally, the lower competition in these areas provides a unique advantage for new photographers aiming to grow their portfolios.

Understanding seasonal trends in the photography business can help you manage demand fluctuations and optimise your operations.

For instance, wedding photographers often see a surge in bookings during the autumn and summer months when outdoor ceremonies are most popular. Similarly, event photographers experience high demand during corporate events and festival seasons. 

Some months bring a surge of customers, while others slow down, making it essential to plan ahead. Adapting strategically to these cycles ensures consistent revenue and business stability throughout the year.

A lively celebration with people joyfully throwing vibrant coloured powders into the air
A vibrant festival moment, highlighting the energy and colour that seasonal events can bring to photography | Source: Pablo Mesa Photo

Identify popular seasons for photography services

The most popular seasons for photography services are autumn and late spring, with April, May, and March consistently showing the highest demand, based on 2024 job posting data on Oneflare.

Key factors influencing these peak months include seasonal events, weddings, and tourism activities. Outdoor-friendly weather in these months also plays a significant role, particularly for event and wedding photography.

Peak season for wedding photography

Wedding photography sees its busiest months in April, March, and January. The pleasant weather during autumn (March-April) and summer (January) makes these months ideal for outdoor weddings, contributing significantly to the demand for professional photographers to capture these cherished moments.

Peak season for portrait and group photography

Portrait and group photography peaks in May, November, and September. Families and groups often book sessions during these months to create memorable keepsakes for the holidays (November) or capture milestone events in spring and autumn.

Peak season for event photography

Event photography experiences the highest demand in July, May, and April. Corporate events, mid-year conferences, and social gatherings frequently occur during these months, driving the need for professional event photographers to provide comprehensive coverage.

Peak season for product and fashion photography

Demand for product and fashion photography is the highest in October, July, and September. These months align with major fashion launches, product releases, and seasonal advertising campaigns, making them critical periods for photographers specialising in these fields.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

Seasonal demand can significantly impact a photography business, with weddings peaking in warmer months or holiday portraits surging near year’s end. Planning ahead for these seasonal changes can help you have a steady income that keeps your business thriving year-round.

Diversify photography services

To combat seasonal slowdowns, expand your service offerings to cater to different client needs throughout the year. For example, if wedding photography is slower in the off-season, consider focusing on portrait, product, or event photography. Offering a mix of services ensures that you’re not overly reliant on any one niche and that you can accommodate a broader audience.

Offer seasonal promotions 

Take advantage of specific times of the year by offering limited-time deals or discounts. For example, offer a special rate for family portraits around the holiday season or bundle packages for weddings during the summer. Seasonal promotions keep clients engaged. They also encourage bookings during slower periods.

Build partnerships with local businesses

Collaborating with local businesses can help you tap into new client pools. Partner with event planners, real estate agents, or wedding florists to get referrals or bundled service offerings. These partnerships create mutual benefits and ensure a consistent flow of leads throughout the year, regardless of the season.

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring photography clients

Utilise lead generation platforms like Oneflare to connect with clients actively seeking photography services. Regularly updating your profile and responding to job listings increases your visibility and helps secure recurring clients, especially during slower months when you’re looking to fill your schedule. Engaging with these platforms keeps your business on the radar of potential customers year-round.

Oneflare's webpage showcasing top-rated photographers near a specific location, with details like customer reviews, qualifications, and star ratings
Leverage lead generation platforms like Oneflare to connect with potential clients and build a steady stream of photography bookings.

Register your photography business on Oneflare today and connect with clients searching for trusted photographers like you!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the photography industry

When you understand what other photographers in your area charge for their services, you can set fair prices that reflect your skill level. By studying competitors, you can also refine your services and stand out to your target audience.

Understand the cost of common photography services

Several factors influence the cost of photography services in Australia. One of the main considerations is experience and skill level. Experienced photographers with a strong portfolio or specialised skills can command higher rates. 

The type of photography service also plays a significant role—wedding photography, for example, is often priced higher due to the extensive hours, editing, and preparation required.

Location is another important factor, as pricing can vary based on the cost of living and demand in different areas of Australia. Photographers in metropolitan cities like Sydney or Melbourne typically charge more than those in regional areas due to higher overhead costs and increased competition.

Here’s a breakdown of the typical costs for various photography services in Australia:

Types of Photography ServicesPrice Range
Wedding photography cost$700 – $4,000 per event
Portrait photography cost$100 – $550 per session
Event photography cost$100 – $600 per event
Engagement photography cost$150 – $600 per session
Commercial or real estate photography cost$150 – $500 per session
Pet photography cost$100 – $300 per session

The prices listed above are approximate estimates and can vary depending on several factors. If you consider the duration of a session, longer events such as weddings or corporate functions that require more hours will naturally cost more than a quick portrait session.

Similarly, post-production work, such as complex editing or custom album designs, increases the amount of time spent on a project, raising the overall photography costs.

Decide how to charge for photography services

There are various ways to decide how much you should charge for your photography services. Choose a method that’s convenient for both you and your clients.

Hourly rate for short-term or time-specific photography services

Charging by the hour is ideal for short-term sessions such as headshots, small events, or product shoots. This method offers flexibility and transparency, allowing clients to pay only for the time spent.

Flat package rates for all-inclusive photography services

Flat package rates are common for services like weddings or family portraits, where a set price covers all aspects of the shoot, including the photographer’s time, editing, and deliverables. This payment method sets clear expectations on pricing and includes a comprehensive service, while allowing photographers to plan their time and resources efficiently.

Per-photo pricing for high-quality images

With per-photo pricing, clients pay based on the number of photos they wish to purchase. This pricing structure is ideal for those requiring high-quality images, or shoots where clients can select their favourite images. This allows photographers to charge for the value of each image while giving clients the flexibility to choose how many images they want to buy.

Day rates for longer photography projects

Day rates are typically used for extended sessions or larger projects, such as corporate events or real estate shoots, where the photographer is booked for an entire day. This ensures a stable income for longer shoots and is easier to manage for the photographer in terms of scheduling and planning.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Think of how you can set your business apart from the competition by looking into your USPs. Consider our suggestions below and customise them for your target market.

Specialised photography expertise

A photography business that offers specialised expertise—such as wedding, commercial, or drone photography—stands out by focusing on a niche. Clients often seek professionals with specific skills and knowledge since they can expect higher-quality results tailored to their needs. This expertise builds trust and positions the photographer as a go-to specialist in a particular area, which can lead to repeat business and referrals.

Customised and personalised photography services

Offering customised and personalised services ensures that each client’s vision is met with attention to detail and creativity. Whether it’s tailoring a shoot to capture a unique family dynamic or designing bespoke photo packages for a wedding, this approach makes clients feel valued as their expectations are exceeded. Personalisation helps differentiate a business from competitors and fosters long-term client relationships.

Consistent quality of digital and printed images 

A strong selling point for any photography business is the ability to consistently produce high-quality images, both digitally and in print. Clients expect clear, sharp, and visually striking images, and providing this will build your reputation for reliability and excellence. Eventually, clients will be able to openly trust you to flawlessly capture their significant life events.

Value-added photography offerings

Including value-added services can enhance the client experience. Offerings such as album design, extra prints, or a sneak peek of photos not only provide extra value but also make clients feel special and appreciated. These can set you apart from competitors, creating a memorable experience that encourages clients to return and recommend the services to others.

Oneflare business directory page listing unique selling points (USPs) for a photography business
Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your photography business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: Crayluxmedia

Step 4: Explore funding options for your photography business

Securing funding for your photography business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business meeting with a photographer in formal attire reviewing documents and discussing funding opportunities
An aspiring photography business owner consulting a professional advisor about financial strategies and funding options | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial photography supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your photography business, like vehicles and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup photography businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic photography business plan

Starting a photography business requires a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business. 

A photographer analysing a business plan document with graphs and charts on a desk next to a laptop
A photographer analysing a detailed business plan with charts and graphs in preparation for starting a photography business | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your photography business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your photography business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your photography company description

Your photography business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your photography business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your photography niche and types of services

The next step is describing what your photography business will focus on, whether it’s wedding photography, portrait photography, commercial photography, or a specific niche like real estate, product, or drone photography.

Explain why you chose this niche and include a brief description of your target market. This could be families looking for timeless portraits, couples planning their dream wedding, or small businesses needing professional visuals to showcase their products and services effectively.

An aerial view of a coastal highway with a single car driving along, surrounded by rocky cliffs and turquoise ocean waters
Define your niche when starting a photography business, whether specialising in aerial photography, landscapes, or travel documentation | Source: Kess Media

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and photography business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your photography services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of photography services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks when starting a photography business, such as equipment theft or damage, missed deadlines, client dissatisfaction, or liability issues during shoots. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of business insurance coverage needed, like public liability insurance or equipment insurance.

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new photography services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your photography business

To start a photography business, you may need to obtain a specific photography business license, registrations,  and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government. 

Step 7: Hire your photographers

Building a reliable team for your photography business is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire the right employees for your photography business and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A wedding photographer showing a bride the video playback on a professional camera
Hire the right photographers and build a skilled team that can connect with clients and deliver high-quality results | Source: Schmal, Bjoern

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (such as wedding photography, portrait sessions, event coverage, or product shoots) and any qualifications or technical skills required. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and hire photographers effectively, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, photography skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask how they managed challenging shoots in the past, adapted to unexpected changes in lighting or weather, or handled tight deadlines while meeting client expectations.

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your photographers will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Begin with training sessions to go over your photography business’s standards, client interaction guidelines, and any workflows or editing protocols they need to follow.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your team members. 

Step 8: Invest in the right photography tools and equipment

Investing in the right tools and equipment is crucial for delivering professional-quality photography services. Start with a reliable camera body and versatile lenses suited to your niche, such as a wide-angle lens for landscapes or a portrait lens for headshots.

Accessories like tripods, lighting kits, memory cards, and editing software should also be part of your essentials. Focus on quality over quantity. Invest in gear that will last and expand your toolkit as your business grows.

Bear in mind, though, that each photography niche requires specialised tools and equipment. Here’s a breakdown of some key tools and equipment, and their estimated costs:

Photography Tools and EquipmentPrice RangeWhere to Buy
Camera (DSLR or mirrorless)$800 – $5,000Camera House, JB Hi-Fi, Amazon
Lenses (prime, zoom, or specialty)$300 – $3,000Ted’s Cameras, DigiDirect, eBay
Tripod$50 – $500CameraPro, Harvey Norman, Amazon
Lighting equipment (softboxes, LEDs)$150 – $1,500B&H Photo, DigiDirect, JB Hi-Fi
Editing software (e.g., Adobe Suite)$20 – $80 per monthAdobe.com
Cloud storage and backup$5 – $30 per monthGoogle Drive, Dropbox, OneDrive
Photography backdrops$50 – $300Backdrop Shop, Amazon
External hard drive (1TB or more)$80 – $300Officeworks, JB Hi-Fi, Amazon
Memory cards (SD/CF)$20 – $150Officeworks, Camera House, eBay
Drone for aerial photography$1,000 – $3,500DJI, JB Hi-Fi, DigiDirect
Camera bag$50 – $300Lowepro, Harvey Norman, Amazon

Note: Costs may vary depending on brand, quality, and specific business needs.

Step 9: Find clients for your photography business

Finding out how to get more clients for your photography business is crucial for growing your brand and building a steady stream of income. Strategies such as building a website and leveraging social media will help you connect with potential clients and establish a strong client base.

Expand your online presence

The strength of your online presence can make or break businesses these days, especially if you have a photography business that offers media services. Your clients need to see what you offer and online websites and social media pages offer a great opportunity to showcase them.

Build your photography business website

A website is essential for establishing your photography business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

To guide you, we’ve compiled examples of successful photography business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

David Madden Photography

David Madden Photography’s website has a simple structure that’s easy to adopt if you’re just starting out. It immediately emphasises that they specialise in wedding photography, and as you scroll down the home page, you can see the versatility of their work with colours and textures in their photos. 

It’s also convenient to get in touch with the photographer since there are options to do so at the top, middle, and bottom of the page. The page also includes testimonials from satisfied clients, adding to their credibility.

Screenshot of David Madden Photography's website homepage featuring a bride and groom walking hand in hand on a pier
David Madden Photography’s website showcases a naturally candid approach to celebrating love | Source: David Madden Photography
Love is Light Wedding Photography

Love is Light Wedding Photography’s website is flush with beautiful photos of gorgeous couples and wedding guests. It shows a lot of people having fun, which is what clients want during weddings. They showcase some of their strengths such as attention to detail and editing services, but also establish their branding as kind and friendly to people who are awkward or don’t like being photographed. This clearly states their niche target market. 

A screenshot of Love is Light Wedding Photography's website featuring a romantic moment between a bride and groom standing near the ocean
Love is Light Wedding Photography’s website showcases their niche market. Their attention to detail is reflected in their stunning portfolio | Source: Love is Light Wedding Photography
Sean Reefman Photography

Sean Reefman Photography’s website tastefully features testimonials and rave reviews throughout the home page. This is a good strategy to consider to remind customers of why they should avail of your services. Apart from these, the service packages they offer as well as featured photo galleries from their most successful events are easily accessible for reference. And with a sticky header that contains their contact button, clients can also get in touch with a simple click.

A screenshot of Sean Reefman Photography's website featuring a bird's-eye view of a bride and groom sitting on a rustic wooden pier surrounded by lush greenery and water
Sean Reefman Photography’s website combines elegance and functionality to attract potential clients and inspire trust | Source: Sean Reefman Photography

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for photography businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for photography services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your photography expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

A profile page for Appleby Photography on a lead generation platform, showcasing business qualifications, contact details, operating hours, reviews, and a section for users to request quotes for services
Leverage platforms like Oneflare to showcase your photography business, including qualifications, reviews, and contact details, making it easier for clients to find and hire your services | Source: Appleby Photography

Get started on Oneflare by registering your photography business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

A Google search results page for "best photographer in Penrith" showing organic listings, a "People also ask" section, and links to photography services and reviews
Invest in SEO and paid search to rank higher in search results for targeted keywords like “best photographer in your area” to attract clients actively looking for your services | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your photography portfolio visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

The following sections provide samples to inspire you and give you an idea of how lead generation works for photographers via social media. They showcase effective strategies for boosting a photography business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

Image Style Studio – Facebook advertising

Image Style Studio has a straightforward marketing style. They take photos and post them with short descriptive captions and hashtags. This strategy often works as long as you’re also posting consistently as they do, with at least one album post per month. With a similar type of content for the most part for each post, the focus is mostly on the photos they take. 

A quick scan through their Facebook page will help you see the diversity of their services, from events, weddings, and portrait photography among others. The variety of options is very attractive to a wide range of customers.

The Facebook page of Image Style Studio, showcasing its photography services, including glamour, family portraits, corporate headshots, weddings, and events
Utilise social media platforms like Facebook and highlight your services, engage with clients through posts and reels, and showcase your portfolio to attract more customers | Source: Image Style Studio
Carlita Sari – Instagram advertising

Calita Sari’s Instagram account features an attractive grid that truly embodies the “world of colour, fun and magic” in her bio. This way, the photographer is able to show that they can deliver what they promise. They also make use of their story highlights to feature reviews and community updates. 

This photography business account doesn’t have a lot of gimmicks in its content strategy. Even their reels are more like slideshows of photos they’ve taken. However, their high engagement could probably be attributed to their consistent posting on their grid and stories plus a sincere content creation that speaks to their target audience.

The Instagram profile of Carlitasariphoto, showcasing a vibrant feed of wedding photography
Build your brand on Instagram, showcase your unique photography style, connect with potential clients, and create a visual story that reflects your personality and expertise | Source: Carlita Sari Photo
FVM Photography- TikTok advertising

FVM Photography’s TikTok account incorporates a social media marketing strategy that prioritises trends. Their content is composed mostly of point-of-view or POV-style videos with a few tutorials, unboxings, and comment responses sprinkled in between. 

The types of content that they post are easy to make, fun, and relatable, making them likely to go viral since you can make a lot of content in a short amount of time when they can be easily picked up by the social media algorithm. This allows you to reach clients you wouldn’t otherwise reach without social media.

The TikTok profile of Felipe Villegas Munera, a Sydney-based photographer with over 934.3K followers and 7.6M likes
Leverage TikTok to share photography tips, behind-the-scenes insights, and showcase your work | Source: FVM Photography

Build your photography’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

Oneflare's page featuring client reviews for a photoraphy business. The reviews highlight positive experiences, professionalism, and excellent photo quality from clients in various locations like Beenleigh, Surfers Paradise, and Cornubia
Build your photography business’s reputation by collecting positive reviews and referrals | Source: Edge Photography

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders, and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks. 

Step 10: Get paid for your photography services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your photography services.

A close-up of a person tapping a 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen, highlighting the convenience of accepting online payments for photography services
A person using convenient online payment to pay for a photography service | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a photography business invoice

Creating a professional invoice template is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable blank photography invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free photography invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s photography invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's invoice design interface
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing photography invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s photography invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for various businesses, such as photography businesses. The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for photography services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s photography invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help photography businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s photography invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organised layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for photography businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking photography services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Capture the moments that matter–boost your photography business today!

Having your passion as a local photographer rely on capturing the most important moments in people’s lives is a great opportunity, from taking someone’s headshots while they’re job hunting to capturing a married couple’s first dance. Here, we’ve laid out everything you need to turn your passion project into a viable business and to help make people’s dreams come true. 

If you’re ready to take your photography business to the next level, register your business on Oneflare and connect with local clients who are actively looking for expert and trustworthy photography services. By creating a profile, you can easily showcase your work, gain new leads, and build lasting relationships with customers in your area.

Don’t miss out on the opportunity to expand your reach and boost your visibility—join Oneflare today and start capturing the moments that matter for your clients.


FAQs on how to start a photography business

What social media platform is best for photographers?

The best social media platform for photographers is Instagram since it’s  highly visual and allows photographers to showcase their portfolios, engage with followers, and connect with potential clients.

How do I showcase my photography portfolio?

To showcase your photography portfolio, create a professional website that highlights your best work. Then, you can organise it by categories or themes, and include detailed information about your services. You can also use social media platforms like Instagram to share your photos, engage with your audience, and build an online presence.

How much does it cost to start a photography business?

The cost of starting a photography business in Australia can vary widely depending on the scale of the business and the equipment required. On average, you can expect to spend between $15,500 to $23,500 for essential startup costs. This includes purchasing high-quality camera gear (lenses, bodies, and accessories), a computer for editing, software subscriptions (such as Adobe Lightroom or Photoshop), business registration, insurance, and a website.

Additional costs may include marketing, studio or office space (if necessary), and ongoing expenses for things like prints or travel.

Categories
Business guides

How to start a construction business

Starting your own construction business can be overwhelming, especially when resources are limited. The challenge lies in more than just having the right tools or licenses—it’s about knowing how to win your first clients, establish a reputation for quality, and create a foundation that allows your business to grow.

This guide covers all the essentials you need to know about how to start a business in construction. From handling solo projects to attracting your first clients and scaling up to handle bigger, more profitable projects, we’ll help you lay the groundwork for your business to thrive.

Step 1: Identify the market of your construction business

Before you start laying bricks or drawing up contracts, you need to know who you’re building for. By analysing market demand, studying competitors, and narrowing down your target audience, you can position your construction business where it’s most likely to succeed. Let’s explore how to define your niche and stand out in a crowded industry.

Explore different types of construction services

Choosing the right building construction services for your business depends on local demand and your expertise. From home renovations to site preparation, each service has unique opportunities and challenges. Understanding these options helps you focus on what aligns with your skills and resources.

Home renovation services

Home renovation projects focus on upgrading kitchens, bathrooms, and living areas to meet modern standards. These services are in high demand as homeowners seek to increase property value or improve functionality. Energy-efficient upgrades like better insulation and lighting are also popular among eco-conscious clients.

A clean and modern open-plan kitchen featuring white cabinetry, a large island bench, and polished timber flooring
A home renovation project featuring a modern kitchen with sleek cabinetry and a spacious island bench | Source: Acev Homes

New home construction services 

Working as a new home builder involves creating custom houses, duplexes, or multi-family units tailored to clients’ needs. These services are in high demand as urbanisation and population growth drive the need for new housing developments. First-time buyers and property investors often work with custom home builders and carpentry businesses to bring their projects to life.

Concrete pouring and finishing

Concreting involves laying foundations, driveways, sidewalks, patios, and other essential structures for residential and commercial projects. It’s a critical service, as concrete forms the backbone of most construction projects. Decorative options like stamping or polishing are increasingly popular for creating stylish yet durable outdoor spaces.

A construction site with exposed brickwork and structural concrete elements
Construction site showcasing brickwork and structural concrete elements in progress | Source: Beltam Projects

Demolition services

Demolition involves safely tearing down residential, commercial, or industrial structures to clear sites for new projects. It’s in high demand for urban redevelopment and infrastructure upgrades, which makes it an essential service in growing areas. Proper debris removal and site cleanup are also critical to preparing the area for future construction.

Pool construction services

Building custom swimming pools, whether in-ground or above-ground, is a sought-after service in suburban and affluent markets. Clients often look for added features like pool decks or waterfalls to create luxury outdoor spaces. Trends in outdoor living and entertainment continue to fuel the demand for these projects.

Offering pool construction requires careful planning to address soil conditions and comply with local water usage regulations. Seasonal demand and long project timelines can also affect scheduling and resource management. Ensuring your business license for construction covers pool installations is essential to operating legally and building trust with clients.

Home extension services 

Home extension services focus on adding new spaces like sunrooms, garages, or second stories to existing properties. These projects are especially popular in areas with limited land availability, where expanding upwards or outwards is the only option. They appeal to growing families and homeowners looking to increase functionality or create rental income opportunities.

Land development services 

Land development services involve transforming raw land into buildable plots for residential, commercial, or industrial projects. This includes managing utilities installation, drainage systems, and road construction to prepare sites for future use. It’s a lucrative niche, especially in urban growth areas and emerging markets where demand for new developments is high.

Site preparation services

Site preparation services focus on clearing land and levelling terrain to make sites ready for construction. This work is essential for projects ranging from small residential builds to large-scale infrastructure developments. It often involves earthmoving and excavations, installing erosion control measures, and setting up initial utility connections to meet project requirements.

These services rely heavily on machinery like bulldozers and excavators, which makes expertise in operating and maintaining equipment critical. Challenges can include dealing with unstable soil or uncovering unexpected underground utilities. Ensuring your construction business license covers site preparation is crucial for meeting regulatory requirements and securing contracts.

Choose your construction business niche

Whether it’s residential, commercial, or specialised services, choosing the right niche is essential for building a profitable construction company that aligns with market demand and your expertise. 

Residential construction niche

The residential construction niche focuses on building homes, apartments, and townhouses to meet the growing demand for housing. If you’ve decided to focus on townhouse building, you can cater to urban clients seeking compact, affordable living spaces. This market offers steady opportunities, from custom builds to energy-efficient upgrades and luxury properties.

  • Pros: High demand ensures steady work opportunities.
  • Cons: Regulatory hurdles and cost fluctuations require constant oversight.

Commercial construction niche

The commercial construction niche involves building offices, retail spaces, hotels, and warehouses for growing urban and business demands. Projects often require extensive scaffolding setups and rely on construction labour to meet tight deadlines and specific design requirements. This niche offers opportunities in large-scale, high-budget developments and mixed-use spaces.

  • Pros: High profitability with opportunities for repeat business.
  • Cons: Complex projects with economic and time constraints demand precise execution.
A clean and modern dental clinic featuring an ergonomic dental chair, cabinetry, advanced equipment, and decorative flowers, highlighting the work of commercial construction for healthcare environments
A modern dental clinic interior showcasing successful commercial construction for healthcare facilities | Source: Toner Constructions

Restoration and historic preservation niche

The restoration and historic preservation niche focuses on repairing and updating historic buildings while maintaining their original architectural integrity. This work often involves collaborating with heritage organisations and local governments to meet strict preservation guidelines. Demand is steady in culturally significant areas or regions with older structures, often supported by government grants or tax incentives. 

  • Pros: Builds credibility with unique, high-profile projects.
  • Cons: Requires extensive expertise and adherence to strict preservation standards.

Industrial construction niche

The industrial construction niche involves building factories, power plants, warehouses, and refineries to support industrial and technological growth. These large-scale projects often require collaboration with an architect and specialised engineers to design and execute complex installations. The demand for industrial facilities continues to grow with advancements in technology and industrial expansion.

  • Pros: High profitability through long-term contracts and corporate partnerships.
  • Cons: High capital requirements and stringent regulatory compliance demand careful planning.

Sustainable building and construction niche

The sustainable building niche is about creating environmentally friendly and energy-efficient structures using renewable materials and innovative designs. With growing awareness of climate change, the demand for green buildings has significantly increased, and is mostly supported by government incentives and consumer preference.

  • Pros: High demand with premium pricing and government support.
  • Cons: High upfront costs and the need for specialised expertise.

Sports and recreation construction niche 

The sports and recreation niche zeroes in on building facilities like stadiums, fitness centres, parks, and golf courses. Demand is increasing as governments and private entities invest in community and professional sports infrastructure. These projects often involve schools, community centres, and professional teams, which provides high visibility and long-term growth potential.

  • Pros: High-visibility projects with long-term opportunities.
  • Cons: Seasonal demand and high initial investment can strain resources.

Land clearing and development niche 

The land clearing and development niche focuses on preparing raw land for construction by clearing vegetation, levelling terrain, and installing utilities. It’s often the first step in large-scale residential, commercial, or industrial projects, which makes it critical to new developments in urban and suburban areas. This niche requires heavy machinery and skilled operators to handle the technical demands of site preparation.

  • Pros: High profitability with steady demand in growing areas.
  • Cons: Significant investment and stringent regulations require careful management.

Demolition niche 

The demolition niche involves safely tearing down structures to clear sites for new development. It often involves handling hazardous materials, such as asbestos, and recycling debris to minimise environmental impact. This niche is in high demand for urban redevelopment and replacing aging or damaged buildings.

  • Pros: High demand with opportunities for diversification into recycling.
  • Cons: Heavy regulatory requirements and equipment costs add operational complexity.

Decide on the service area for your construction business

Determining where to establish or grow your construction business is a fundamental step to securing a strong start in the industry. By focusing on regions with high demand for construction services, you can position yourself strategically in areas that offer the best potential for steady work and long-term growth.

The table below shows the demand for construction services across different cities in Australia, based on Oneflare’s job posting data from 2024. We’ll break down each city’s demand and explore the factors driving the need for construction services in these cities.

CityPercentage Share of Total Construction Job Demand
Construction jobs in Sydney38.85%
Construction jobs in Melbourne31.05%
Construction jobs in Brisbane12.63%
Construction jobs in Perth4.22%
Construction jobs in Central Coast2.30%

Australian cities with the highest construction job demand

Sydney, holding 38.85% of the market demand, shows the highest need for construction services. This high demand stems from Sydney’s dense population and rapid urban development, creating a robust market with consistent work opportunities across residential, commercial, and infrastructure projects. The city’s strong real estate market further contributes to this need, with both new builds and renovations in high demand to keep up with growth.

Melbourne, with 31.05% of total demand, follows closely behind Sydney. Melbourne’s steady expansion and sprawling suburban growth generate a reliable stream of construction projects, from housing developments to infrastructure upgrades. This growth trend makes Melbourne an attractive area for new construction businesses looking to tap into a stable flow of work, especially in the residential and commercial sectors.

Brisbane, which holds 12.63% of the market demand, has seen notable growth as a metropolitan hub. Brisbane’s expanding residential areas and infrastructure projects reflect a consistent need for construction services, making it a promising region for small business owners aiming to build their reputation. The increase in residential developments offers excellent entry points for smaller projects that can help new businesses establish themselves and gradually expand to larger contracts.

Australian cities with lower construction job demand

While cities like Perth and the Central Coast have lower demand shares of 4.22% and 2.3%, respectively, they offer distinct advantages for new construction businesses. With less competition, it’s often easier to establish strong local relationships, build a loyal client base, and secure steady work. 

Working in these areas allows businesses to develop a reputation as a go-to provider, especially valuable as these regions continue to grow and evolve. Plus, smaller cities and regional markets often provide unique project opportunities that can help new businesses stand out.

Seasonal trends significantly impact the construction industry, with certain months experiencing higher activity across various types of construction services. By being aware of these peak periods, you can position your business to take full advantage of increased demand, ensuring a steady workflow and building your client base.

A modern architectural design featuring exposed timber beams, slanted roofing, and a natural setting
Plan ahead for seasonal trends in the construction industry to ensure timely completion of unique projects like this contemporary timber design | Source: R.J & S.M Stapleton

Identify popular seasons for construction services

According to Oneflare’s 2024 data on the total job postings, construction demand tends to peak during the months of August, September, and March across most services. These months typically offer favourable weather and stable conditions, allowing projects to proceed efficiently. Being prepared for these peak periods can help your business capture more opportunities, ensuring steady growth and a strong client base.

Peak season for home renovation

The demand for home renovation projects is the highest in October, August, and September. During these months, homeowners focus on preparing their spaces for upcoming seasonal changes, such as winter or holiday gatherings, making it a busy time for renovation projects.

Peak season for new home construction

New home construction is most active in August, March, and July. Late summer and early spring offer the best conditions for foundational work, framing, and exterior builds, enabling builders to stay on schedule and avoid weather-related delays.

Peak season for concrete pouring and finishing

Concrete pouring and finishing projects reach their peak in July, August, and September. These warm months support optimal curing and ensure that large-scale outdoor projects can be completed smoothly without interruptions from adverse weather.

Peak season for pool construction

Pool construction is the busiest in April, May, and June as homeowners aim to have pools ready for summer. Starting in spring allows construction teams to complete projects in time for the warmest months, giving clients full access to their pools for the season.

Peak season for home extensions

Home extension projects peak in September, August, and July. These months provide stable weather and longer daylight hours, making them ideal for structural work. Many families plan extensions to create additional space before winter arrives.

Peak season for land development

Land development typically begins in March, April, and May. The stable spring weather is ideal for clearing and preparing land, laying the groundwork for further construction phases that follow in summer.

Peak season for site preparation

Site preparation is the busiest in February, March, and April. Early-year preparation aligns with upcoming spring and summer projects, ensuring that sites are cleared, graded, and ready for the main construction season.

Plan strategies to adapt to seasonal fluctuations

Adapting to seasonal fluctuations is essential for construction businesses, especially for those just starting out. Strategic planning for shifts in demand can keep projects flowing, reduce downtime, and help grow a reliable client base year-round. 

Implementing these strategies can ensure your construction business thrives through every season.

Diversify service offerings

By providing a range of services that peak in different seasons, you can maintain steady work year-round. For instance, if summer months are ideal for exterior construction and concrete pouring, focus on these during warmer months. In the colder season, shift your focus to interior renovation projects, maintenance work, or smaller jobs less affected by weather conditions. 

Invest in weather-resistant materials and technology

Using high-quality, weather-resistant materials and equipment allows you to extend your work season and handle projects even during less favourable weather. 

For example, using quick-curing concrete or materials that can withstand moisture helps mitigate delays and ensures the quality of your work. Similarly, investing in temporary shelters or heating equipment for on-site work can make a significant difference in managing projects through colder or wetter months.

Use seasonal promotions to drive demand during slower periods

To boost business in quieter months, consider offering targeted promotions, such as discounts on indoor renovations during winter or early booking incentives for spring projects. These strategies not only help fill gaps in your schedule but also attract new clients who may be more price-conscious. 

Post on lead generation sites to secure recurring construction clients

Signing up on lead generation platforms like Oneflare allows you to connect with clients who need consistent, recurring construction work, such as property managers, real estate developers, and commercial clients. 

By regularly posting your services and updating client reviews on these platforms, you can build a steady pipeline of high-quality leads that help smooth out seasonal dips in demand. This strategy is particularly useful for securing long-term clients who may require ongoing work across multiple properties or projects.

A webpage from Oneflare displaying top-rated builders with reviews, qualifications, and service details
Leverage lead generation platforms like Oneflare to secure recurring construction clients and grow your business effectively

Register your construction business on Oneflare today to showcase your expertise and start connecting with clients actively searching for your services!

Step 3: Research market rates and analyse competitors in the construction industry

Understanding market rates and competitor strategies is key to pricing your services competitively and securing big construction contracts. Thorough research ensures your pricing aligns with industry standards while highlighting areas where your business can stand out.

Understand the cost of common construction services

The cost of construction services depends on materials, labour, equipment, and compliance requirements. Premium materials, like hardwood or custom finishes, are pricier than standard alternatives. Labour costs fluctuate based on skill level and project complexity. Equipment rentals or purchases, along with insurance and overhead expenses, also contribute to the final pricing.

Here’s a breakdown of the typical cost of construction services in Australia:

Type of construction servicesPrice 
Home renovation cost$15,000 – $200,000+
New home construction cost$1,000 – $4,000 per m
Draftsman cost$3,000 – $15,000
Architect cost$800 – $4,500
Carpenter cost$40 – $80 per hour 
Concrete pouring and finishing cost$45 – $150 per m²
Pool construction cost$6,500 – $100,000+
Home extension cost$2,000 – $4,000 per m²
Site preparation cost$365 – $500 per hour for site planning surveys; excavation costs range from $850 to $15,000 for house foundations.

These figures are general estimates and may vary based on location, market trends, and specific project requirements. Always tailor pricing to reflect unique conditions and updated market data.

Decide how to charge for construction services

Choosing how to charge for construction services depends on the project type, complexity, and client preferences. Options like hourly rates, square metre pricing, or flat project fees simplify invoicing and can be tailored using a construction invoice template.

Hourly rate for smaller or less complex construction projects

Charging an hourly rate works well for minor repairs, handyman tasks, or small-scale renovations. It’s ideal for projects where timelines or scopes are uncertain, which allows flexibility for adjustments. General labourers and other tradespeople can use this model to ensure they’re compensated for extended or unexpected work.

Hourly rates vary by trade. Builders might charge $25-$40 per hour, while electricians and plumbers can charge $60-$120 per hour. To avoid disputes, clearly define the scope of work and document hours spent on the project. While this model is transparent, some clients may find it unpredictable, so regular updates are essential to maintain trust.

Square meter rates for projects determined by size

Square metre rates are ideal for projects like flooring, roofing, or painting, where the area directly impacts the workload. For larger tasks such as building a house, this pricing model helps clients estimate costs based on size and complexity. Residential construction rates, for instance, typically range from $1,500-$3,000 per square metre.

Flat project rate for bigger construction projects

A flat project rate works best for comprehensive jobs like building homes, offices, or commercial spaces from scratch. It offers clients upfront pricing, which makes it easier to plan for large investments. For example, you can charge a flat rate of  $200,000-$500,000 for building a house.

Cost-plus model for long-term construction projects 

The cost-plus model is ideal for large, complex projects where upfront cost estimates are challenging. This pricing approach adds a markup, typically 10-20%, to the actual costs of materials and labour, which ensures profitability. It works well for long-term projects where unforeseen expenses are likely to arise.

Per-service or unit-based pricing for specialised construction projects

Per-service or unit-based pricing works well for niche services like concrete pouring, landscaping, or demolition. This model sets prices based on specific deliverables, such as $150-$300 per cubic metre for concrete pouring, or $20-$50 per square metre for demolition. It’s particularly effective when tasks are clearly defined and measurable.

Evaluate your unique selling points (USPs)

Defining your USPs helps your construction business stand out by highlighting what you do best, from eco-friendly practices to comprehensive end-to-end services. Clear USPs attract clients and position you competitively in the market.

Eco-friendly construction practices

Eco-friendly construction focuses on using sustainable materials like bamboo, recycled steel, and reclaimed wood. Designs often integrate energy-efficient features such as solar panels and green roofs to reduce long-term operational costs for clients. Efficient processes, like reusing materials and cleaning concrete without harmful chemicals, help minimise waste and environmental impact.

Transparent, client-centric communication

Clear and open communication ensures clients stay informed and engaged throughout the project. Regular updates through detailed reports and budget tracking help build trust and minimise misunderstandings. Tools like construction management software enable real-time updates, while dedicated project managers streamline interactions as single points of contact.

Comprehensive end-to-end construction services 

End-to-end construction services cover every stage of a project, from initial design consultations to finishing touches and post-project support. These services integrate architecture, engineering, and interior design, which simplifies the process for clients by offering a one-stop solution. Managing permits, inspections, and regulatory compliance ensures a smooth workflow and consistent quality.

Specialisation in custom and luxury builds

Custom and luxury builds focus on delivering unique, high-quality designs tailored to client preferences. This includes adding features like beautiful architectural elements, using premium materials, and applying innovations such as smart security alarms. Projects can range from building luxury homes to adding a house verandah with intricate finishes that reflect personal style.

A screenshot from Oneflare showcasing unique selling points such as experienced subcontractors, sustainable practices, and customer-focused values
Promoting these USPs on platforms like Oneflare can help your construction business stand out and attract clients seeking tailored services that competitors may not offer | Source: Build It Bro

Step 4: Explore funding options for your construction business

Securing funding for your construction business is an essential first step, and it’s crucial to seek professional advice before making any financial commitments. Consulting with financial planners and local accountants can help you understand the implications of each option and choose the best fit for your business goals. 

A business meeting with a person in formal attire reviewing documents and discussing funding opportunities
An aspiring construction business owner consulting a professional advisor about financial strategies and funding options | Source: iStock

Self-funding

Self-funding involves using personal savings or funds from family and friends. This approach allows full control over finances without needing to meet lender requirements, although it also involves using personal financial resources.

Small business loans

Australian banks and financial institutions offer small business loans designed for startups. These loans generally require a business plan, financial projections, and a good credit history. Small business loans can provide the capital needed for startup expenses, with set repayment terms and interest.

Secured and unsecured business loans

Both secured and unsecured business loans are small business loans that can be viable funding options for purchasing initial construction supplies, equipment, and transportation assets. 

Secured loans offer manageable, low-interest rates, provided collateral is available. This collateral could include personal assets such as residential properties or assets associated with your construction business, like vehicles and equipment.

Meanwhile, an unsecured loan offers businesses fast access to funds without collateral. However, they generally have higher interest rates with shorter loan terms than secured loans, so the monthly payments can be higher. 

Government and industry programs

Certain Australian states provide grants and financial support for small businesses, especially those with innovative or eco-friendly services. These programs are structured to assist with initial costs and often have specific application requirements and conditions.

The New Enterprise Incentive Scheme (NEIS) is one of the government programs in Australia that supports job seekers who want to start small businesses. This offers new entrepreneurs mentorship, accredited training, and income support to help them sustain themselves while establishing their businesses without requiring immediate profit. However, NEIS does not directly fund business costs, so startup capital would still need to be sourced separately.

Equity Investment

Startup construction businesses can secure significant funds without taking on debt that needs immediate repayment through equity investment. It’s a funding option where investors provide money to a business in exchange for ownership shares to get a stake in the company.

There are two types of equity investors: angel investors and venture capitalists (VCs). Angel investors are typically high-net-worth individuals who invest their personal funds into early-stage companies in exchange for equity. Meanwhile, venture capitalists are firms or groups that pool funds from multiple investors to support high-potential businesses.

Step 5: Develop a strategic construction business plan

Starting a construction business is exciting, but to set yourself up for success, you’ll need a well-thought-out business plan. This plan will be your roadmap, guiding you through each stage of starting and running your business.

A construction worker analysing a business plan document with graphs and charts on a desk next to a laptop
A person analysing a detailed business plan with charts and graphs in preparation for starting a construction business | Source: iStock

It should include key elements, such as:

  • Executive summary
  • Company profile
  • Business description
  • Market analysis
  • Services offered and pricing strategy
  • Marketing strategies
  • Budget and cash flow forecast
  • Operations plan
  • Risk mitigation strategy
  • Long-term growth plan

Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process to create a business plan tailored to your construction business.

Draft an executive summary

First, begin with the executive summary, which is a brief overview of your construction business and your goals. This section gives readers a quick sense of what your business is all about. Summarise what services you’ll offer, your target market, and what sets you apart from competitors. It’s often best to write this last so it truly reflects the rest of your plan.

Write your construction company description

Your construction business plan also needs a clear company description. In this section, outline the foundational details of your construction business, including its legal business structure (e.g., sole trader, company, partnership, etc.), ownership details, business name, and location. 

Moreover, your company description should describe your business’s vision, mission, and core values. This section will provide essential context as you move into the more operational and financial specifics of your business plan.

Describe your construction niche and types of services

The next step is describing what your construction business will focus on, whether it’s a renovation or a new home build, residential or commercial construction, or more specific services like pool construction, deck and fence construction, or townhouse building and construction. 

Explain why you chose this niche and include a brief description of your target market. This might include families looking for efficient, reliable renovations and flooring businesses, local developers needing high-quality new builds, or commercial clients who prioritise sturdy, professional-grade finishes for their properties.

A modern residential building featuring a slanted roof, timber cladding, and large glass doors
Define your construction niche and services to attract the right clients for projects, like this stunning modern home design | Source: Niche Constructions

Analyse your market and define your customer base

Once you have completed writing your company profile and construction business niche, it’s time to define your customer base. First, you’ll need to conduct a market analysis to understand your target customers, local competitors, and industry trends. 

From there, outline who your ideal clients are, what they need, and how you plan to serve them better than competitors. This analysis will help you identify market gaps and inform your service offerings.

Outline your construction services and pricing strategy

Your business plan should also specify the types of construction services you’ll offer and your pricing approach. Consider the costs of supplies, labour, and other expenses to price competitively yet profitably. Plus, think about whether you’ll offer package deals, discounts for repeat clients, or seasonal promotions.

Detail your marketing and sales plan

For your marketing and sales plan, you need to map out how you’ll attract and retain clients. Detail your marketing channels—such as social media, SEO, or partnerships—and any customer loyalty or referral programs. Think practically about your initial steps to grow your client base and raise brand awareness in your target market.

Create a budget and forecast cash flow

The budget and forecast cash flow is a crucial part of your business plan. For this section, it’s wise to break down your startup costs, monthly operating expenses, and anticipated revenue. 

Include one-time expenses such as equipment and marketing materials, as well as recurring costs like supplies, transportation, and insurance. 

Then, project your cash flow to understand when you’ll reach profitability and how to manage finances through any seasonal ups and downs.

Establish an operations plan

The operations plan details how you’ll manage day-to-day operations, including hiring, training, and scheduling. Here, describe systems you’ll implement to maintain high-quality service, handle customer feedback, and manage bookings or billing. This section is key to ensuring smooth, efficient operations as your business grows.

Develop a risk mitigation strategy 

After the operations plan, develop a risk management plan to address potential challenges and safeguards for your business. Identify key risks, such as equipment malfunctions, employee accidents, and liability concerns. Outline safety protocols and detail the types of insurance coverage needed, including general liability and workers’ compensation

Conclude with a long-term growth plan

Lastly, conclude with a long-term growth plan to demonstrate your vision for the future and commitment to sustainable growth. In this section, you need to define both short-term and long-term objectives of your business, such as adding new construction services, increasing your client base, or expanding to new locations. Outline strategies to retain existing clients, such as loyalty programs, and how you plan to scale your marketing efforts. 

Step 6: Register your construction business

To start a business, you may need to obtain registrations, licenses and permits. As a business owner, it’s your responsibility to make sure you’re compliant with all applicable laws and meet your tax obligations. 

For information about registering your business or applying for an ABN, we recommend you check out this helpful information from the Australian government

Step 7: Hire your construction workers

Building a reliable team of construction workers is essential for your company’s success and growth. Below, we’ll discuss how you can hire the right employees for your construction business and ensure that they meet your business’s needs.

A contemporary two-storey house with a stone feature wall, a large garage, and workers completing the driveway
Hiring skilled construction workers is key to delivering high-quality projects, like this modern home with a polished driveway | Source:
Graphite Construction Management

Write job description

First and foremost, you need to create a job description that highlights your business and what you offer. Be transparent about job duties, hours, pay, employment type and any training opportunities. Describe specific tasks (like home renovation, pool construction, plastering, scaffolding, demolition, etc.) and any physical requirements. This helps candidates understand expectations from the start and ensures a good match for the role.

Most candidates also appreciate knowing the pay range, benefits, or potential for growth within the company. If you offer flexible hours, a supportive team environment, or training for new employees, mention these aspects. This can make your ad stand out and attract applicants who genuinely want to be part of a stable, rewarding role in a growing company.

Use local Australian platforms to advertise your job

After crafting the job ad, post it on multiple platforms to maximise its visibility. To reach the best candidates and hire construction workers effectively, you may consider advertising on platforms that are popular and effective in Australia, such as:

  • SEEK – Australia’s largest job board, ideal for professional job seekers across industries.
  • Indeed Australia – a wide-reaching job platform, popular among full-time and part-time job seekers.
  • Jora – a job aggregator that pulls listings from various sources, increasing visibility.
  • Workforce Australia – a free job advertising service from the government, suitable for small business owners.

You might also consider posting on social media platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, or Instagram if you have a business page. For a local touch, posting on community boards or participating in job fairs can attract applicants in your area. 

Don’t overlook employee referrals, either—current employees often know reliable candidates, and offering a referral bonus can incentivise them to help bring in great new hires.

Screen and interview thoughtfully

As applications start coming in, review them carefully to find candidates with the right qualifications and experience. Conduct initial interviews with the most promising applicants to gauge their interest in the role, construction and building skills, and alignment with your business. 

This is the perfect chance to ask questions that reveal their previous experience, problem-solving abilities, and reliability. For example, you might ask about how they handled challenging construction jobs in the past or how they ensured they met schedules and client expectations. 

It’s also helpful to perform criminal history checks and reference checks to ensure the trustworthiness of your candidates. This is particularly important if your construction workers will work in sensitive environments like offices or schools. A quick call to past employers can provide insight into their reliability, history, and work quality. 

Make an offer and onboard your new hire

When you’ve selected your top candidate, make a clear and detailed job offer that outlines pay, benefits, work hours, and expectations. 

Once they’ve accepted your offer, the next step is running a smooth onboarding process to set up your new hires for success. Begin with training sessions to go over your company’s construction standards, customer service guidelines, and any safety protocols they need to follow. Training is essential for Work Health and Safety (WHS) compliance and minimises risks.

If possible, have them shadow an experienced team member for their first few shifts so they can learn on the job. After their first week, check in with them and provide feedback to support their improvement and integration into the team.

Offer ongoing support and fair treatment

A supportive work environment promotes employee retention. Openly address concerns about shifts, workload, and safety. This initiative will help create a positive work culture that encourages loyalty and productivity among your team members. 

Step 8: Invest in the right construction tools and equipment

Investing in high-quality tools and equipment is essential for improving efficiency, ensuring safety, and delivering quality results in construction projects.

Bear in mind, though, that each construction service niche requires specialised tools and equipment. Here’s a breakdown of some key items and their estimated costs:

Construction tools and equipmentPrice rangeWhere to buy
Power Drill$100 – $500Bunnings, Total Tools
Circular Saw$150 – $600Sydney Tools, Mitre 10
Hammer$20 – $80Bunnings, Total Tools
Measuring Tape$15 – $50Mitre 10, Sydney Tools
Spirit Level$30 – $100Bunnings, Total Tools
Angle Grinder$100 – $400Mitre 10, Sydney Tools
Cordless Impact Driver$200 – $600Bunnings, Total Tools
Wheelbarrow$100 – $250Sydney Tools, Mitre 10
Ladder (6ft)$100 – $300Bunnings, Total Tools
Concrete Mixer$500 – $2,000Sydney Tools, Mitre 10

Note: Prices are approximate and may vary based on brand and quality. It’s advisable to check the latest prices and availability directly from the suppliers.

Step 9: Find clients for your construction business

Learning how to get clients for construction business means leveraging online tools and networking to showcase your expertise. A strong online presence and strategic outreach help attract and retain the right clients.

Expand your online presence

To attract clients effectively, establishing and maintaining a robust online presence is crucial. Below are detailed strategies to achieve this:

Build your construction business website

A website is essential for establishing your construction business’s credibility and providing clients with easy access to your services. It allows potential clients to learn about your offerings, view testimonials, and request quotes directly. Working with a web designer can ensure a user-friendly, optimised site that effectively showcases your services and improves search visibility.

Here are some construction business websites that display the effectiveness of building a good website to boost brand credibility and improve customer experience. 

Inspiring Homes

The Inspiring Homes website features a clean, professional design with high-quality images showcasing completed projects. Its easy navigation allows potential clients to explore services and view a transparent portfolio of work. This user-friendly approach effectively builds trust and helps clients visualise what Inspiring Homes can deliver.

A homepage of Inspiring Homes promoting custom home building in Sydney
Highlight your experience, achievements, and client trust, as Inspiring Homes does, to attract clients seeking quality and integrity in home building | Source: Inspiring Homes
Kongstruction

Kongstruction’s website uses a modern layout with bold visuals to highlight quality and affordability. Interactive features, like 3D display homes, allow visitors to engage with the design process and imagine their own projects. This interactive experience helps clients become confident and feel connected to their services.

A sleek website for Kongstruction displaying a modern home project
Present your services with clarity and professionalism, as Kongstruction does, to position your construction business as a trusted expert in the industry | Source: Kongstruction
Australian Property Care

Australian Property Care’s website takes a minimalist approach by focusing on their project portfolio and clear service descriptions. The straightforward structure makes it easy for visitors to find information quickly and improves the user experience. This simplicity also ensures clients can make informed decisions about hiring its services right away. 

A website showcasing APC’s diverse construction projects, including residential, commercial, and remedial work
Showcase your past projects and services, like APC does, to build trust and attract potential clients to your construction business | Source: Australian Property Care

Post on lead generation platforms

Posting on lead-generation platforms is one of the most effective ways for construction businesses to find clients. These platforms connect you directly with clients actively searching for construction services, providing an immediate source of leads. 

Oneflare, in particular, allows you to showcase your building and construction expertise without upfront fees, making it easier to attract clients with minimal risk. This platform’s job posting system helps bring in quality leads and enables you to specify job types, budgets, and locations, so you can target projects that fit your capabilities and business goals.

A Oneflare business profile for Reno Vibe, showcasing qualifications, reviews, and business details
Leveraging lead-generation platforms like Oneflare helps construction businesses showcase their expertise, build credibility, and attract new clients | Source: Reno vibe

Get started on Oneflare by registering your construction business today—connect with clients, post targeted jobs, and grow your business with ease!

SEO and paid search for visibility

SEO and paid search improve your website’s visibility in search engine results, attracting organic traffic. While effective, SEO requires regular updates and can be costly in competitive areas. Consulting an SEO specialist helps implement ranking strategies to boost your business’s online presence.

A Google search result for handyman builders reviews in Sydney, showing Oneflare and Airtasker listings
Optimising your website and profiles for SEO ensures your construction business appears in search results like this, making it easier for clients to find and choose your services | Source: Google Search

Social media advertising

Social media advertising helps you reach a wide audience and showcase your construction work visually. Targeted ads on Facebook, Instagram, and even TikTok can attract local clients, but maintaining a presence requires ongoing posting and budget management. A social media manager can optimise your campaigns for consistent engagement.

To give you an idea of how social media advertising works, the following sections provide samples you can take inspiration from, showcasing effective strategies for boosting a construction business’s visibility on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok. 

Build It Bro – Facebook advertising

Build It Bro’s Facebook page effectively highlights their expertise through high-quality project photos and client testimonials. Their regular updates and engaging posts also help maintain audience interest and build trust. 

A Facebook business page for Build It Bro, featuring project photos, company details, and posts highlighting construction achievements and updates
Use platforms like Facebook to showcase your construction projects, share updates, and engage with your audience | Source: Build It Bro
Alborz Homes – Instagram advertising

Alborz Homes’ Instagram account showcases their design expertise through visually appealing posts. Their 1,300+ followers clearly engage with their project highlights and creative reels that show their attention to detail. 

An Instagram profile for Alborz Homes showcasing a mix of construction progress photos, completed projects, and residential building designs
Instagram is a powerful tool to display your portfolio, connect with clients, and promote your brand | Source: Alborz Homes
Ideal Group – TikTok advertising

Ideal Group’s TikTok account uses short, creative videos to showcase behind-the-scenes construction processes. With more than 6,000 followers, their content clearly resonates with their audience and offers a transparent view of their work at the same time.

A TikTok profile for Ideal Group, featuring videos about daily onsite activities, apprenticeship training, and team recruitment
TikTok offers a dynamic way to showcase your construction business through engaging videos, team highlights, and behind-the-scenes content | Source: Ideal Group

Build your construction company’s reputation through reviews and referrals

A strong reputation is key to long-term success. Encourage satisfied clients to leave reviews on your website or lead platforms like Oneflare to boost credibility and attract new clients. Consistent reviews on a platform ensure reliable feedback, helping potential clients trust your quality.

A collection of client reviews on Oneflare praising the professionalism and quality of a construction business's services
Positive client reviews, like these on Oneflare, play a crucial role in building trust and credibility for your construction business | Source: Australian Renovation Professionals

Take bookings and manage quotes efficiently

Responding quickly to quote requests can also help you win jobs, as clients often select the first reliable response. In fact, Oneflare data reveals that 60% of winning quotes are submitted within 60 minutes of the job posting, highlighting that faster quotes significantly boost job success rates. 

Here are some tools that can help with automated booking and quoting:

  • Calendly – Enables easy scheduling by allowing clients to book available time slots directly, reducing back-and-forth communication.
  • Square Appointments – Provides booking, invoicing, and payment processing in one platform, helping streamline the client experience.
  • Setmore – Offers online booking with customisable reminders, plus client management and integration with social media for easy appointment setting.
  • HoneyBook – Combines booking, quoting, and invoicing, letting you automate responses and manage projects all in one place.
  • Zoho Bookings – Integrates with Zoho CRM to manage client relationships, offers automated reminders and allows for easy rescheduling.

These tools help you automate responses, manage quote requests, and follow up with clients, ensuring that no lead falls through the cracks. 

Step 10: Get paid for your construction services!

Now that you have everything set up, from choosing your business niche and setting up your service area, to finally finding your clients, it’s time to finally get paid for your construction services.

A close-up of a person tapping a 'Pay' button on a smartphone screen, highlighting the convenience of accepting online payments for construction services
A person using convenient online payment to pay for a construction service | Source: iStock

Choose a reliable accounting software

Managing payments is a lot easier with a dedicated accounting system. This will save you time, reduce errors, and give you a clear picture of your finances.

Some popular accounting software options commonly used in Australia are:

  • Xero – easy-to-use software with invoicing, bank feeds, and reporting.
  • MYOB – offers payroll, tax tracking, and inventory management.
  • QuickBooks Online – handles invoicing, expense tracking, and payments.
  • Reckon One – customisable and budget-friendly, with modules for payroll and invoicing.
  • Sage Business Cloud Accounting – simple solution for expense tracking and payroll.

Create a construction business invoice 

Creating a professional invoice is essential to get paid quickly. The invoice should clearly list your services, rates, and payment terms. 

Many accounting platforms offer customisable blank construction invoice templates, but you can start with free templates and modify them as needed. Consider these free construction invoice templates as a guide:

Canva’s construction invoice templates

It’s easily customisable with fields for services, rates, and payment terms. You can also add your logo and other brand elements to maintain consistency across all client communications.

A screenshot of Canva's invoice design interface
Canva’s invoice templates allow businesses to create personalised and visually appealing construction invoices | Source: Canva

Conta’s construction invoice templates

It provides a customisable, downloadable template specifically tailored for construction services, The good thing about these templates is that they’re compatible with Google Docs, Microsoft Word, and Excel, allowing you to easily tailor them as needed.

A screenshot of Conta's invoice template platform
Conta’s specialised invoice templates are designed to simplify billing for construction services | Source: Conta

Microsoft Office’s construction invoice templates

It offers free invoice templates that are straightforward and professional and can be saved as a PDF. Even better, they have Excel-based templates that can automate calculations, streamlining the billing process and reducing errors.

A screenshot of Microsoft 365's invoice template gallery featuring customisable invoice designs for various business needs
Microsoft provides a variety of invoice templates to help construction businesses manage billing with professional designs and customisations | Source: Microsoft

Zoho’s construction invoice templates

The template offers a clean and organised layout, ensuring clarity and professionalism in client communications. It includes essential sections such as service details, additional charges, taxes, and terms and conditions, facilitating accurate and transparent billing.

A screenshot of Zoho's service invoice template showcasing detailed fields for creating professional invoices for businesses
Zoho’s service invoice templates offer customisable solutions for construction businesses to streamline billing processes and track payments efficiently | Source: Zoho

Set up a bank account for business payments

Separating personal and business finances with a dedicated bank account makes it easier to track income, manage deposits, and handle reconciliations. Most banks offer online options specifically for businesses, streamlining all your financial needs in one place.

Offer digital payment options

Make payments easy and convenient for clients by providing digital options like Apple Pay, Google Pay, credit cards, and bank transfers. Many clients, especially those booking construction services through platforms like Oneflare, prefer the flexibility of paying directly from their devices. Offering digital payments not only enhances client satisfaction but also speeds up the payment process, helping you maintain a reliable cash flow.

Establish clear payment terms

Define your payment terms upfront to avoid confusion—include due dates, late fees, and preferred payment methods. Clear terms, such as a 14-day payment window, help maintain a steady cash flow and foster professional client relationships.

Build your foundation for success — grow your construction business today!

Starting your construction business is a rewarding journey, and every step you take sets the stage for lasting success. From understanding market demands to building your online presence, each action helps establish credibility and attract clients.

Ready to take the next step? Register your business and post your services on Oneflare to connect with clients looking for skilled builders. Oneflare is a trusted platform that helps businesses like yours reach the right audience and build a steady client base.

Start showcasing your services on Oneflare today and lay the groundwork for a thriving construction business!


FAQs on how to start a construction business

What is the most profitable business in construction?

Real estate development, specialty contracting, and green building are among the most profitable areas, driven by high demand and government incentives. Other lucrative niches include construction equipment rental and residential renovation services, which offer steady revenue streams.

What are the three main sectors in the construction industry in Australia?

Residential construction focuses on building homes and renovations, commercial construction involves offices and industrial facilities, and infrastructure construction covers large public works like roads and railways. These sectors are shaped by population growth, urbanisation, and economic development.

How much capital do I need to start a construction business?

Small-scale businesses need around $20,000-$50,000, medium-sized operations require $50,000-$200,000, and large-scale businesses may need $500,000-$1,000,000 or more. Costs depend on the type of services, equipment needs, and compliance requirements.